User manual

ManualsBrandsMitsubishi Electronics ManualsOtherGarage Door Opener FX3UC

/FX

3GC

/FX

3UC

SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS

PROGRAMMING MANUAL

Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

Summary of content (964 pages)

PAGE 1
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS PROGRAMMING MANUAL Basic & Applied Instruction Edition
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Manual No. JY997D16601 Revision N Date 9/2013 Foreword This manual contains text, diagrams and explanations which will guide the reader through the safe and correct installation, use, and operation of the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series programmable controller.
PAGE 4
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Outline Precautions • This manual provides information for the use of the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers. The manual has been written to be used by trained and competent personnel.
PAGE 5
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Table of Contents Table of Contents Related manuals ............................................................................................................................. 14 Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals .................................................................. 21 1. Introduction 23 1.1 Programming Language in PLCs .................................................................
PAGE 6
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Table of Contents 4.4 State Relay [S] ....................................................................................................................................... 94 4.4.1 Numbers of state relays .......................................................................................................................... 94 4.4.2 Functions and operation examples ...............................................
PAGE 7
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5. How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions Table of Contents 153 5.1 Numeric Values Handled in PLC (Octal, Decimal, Hexadecimal and Real Numbers) ......................... 153 5.1.1 Types of numeric values ....................................................................................................................... 153 5.1.2 Conversion of numeric values........................................
PAGE 8
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8. Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Table of Contents 220 8.1 FNC 00 – CJ / Conditional Jump.......................................................................................................... 221 8.1.1 CJ instruction and operations of contact and coil.................................................................................. 225 8.1.
PAGE 9
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12. Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Table of Contents 315 12.1 FNC 40 – ZRST / Zone Reset............................................................................................................ 316 12.2 FNC 41 – DECO / Decode ................................................................................................................. 320 12.3 FNC 42 – ENCO / Encode .......................................
PAGE 10
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Table of Contents 15.9 FNC 78 – FROM / Read From A Special Function Block .................................................................. 448 15.9.1 Common items between FROM instruction and TO instruction (details) ............................................ 451 15.10 FNC 79 – TO / Write To A Special Function Block .......................................................................... 453 16.
PAGE 11
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20. Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 20.1 20.2 20.3 20.4 20.5 20.6 20.7 20.8 562 FNC160 – TCMP / RTC Data Compare............................................................................................. 563 FNC161 – TZCP / RTC Data Zone Compare .................................................................................... 565 FNC162 – TADD / RTC Data Addition ........................................
PAGE 12
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Table of Contents 26.8 FNC207 – MIDW / Random Replacement of Character Strings ........................................................ 633 26.9 FNC208 – INSTR / Character string search....................................................................................... 636 26.10 FNC209 – $MOV / Character String Transfer .................................................................................. 638 27.
PAGE 13
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 34. FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 Table of Contents 741 34.1 FNC300 – FLCRT / File create•check ............................................................................................... 742 34.1.1 Detailed explanation of setting data .................................................................................................... 743 34.
PAGE 14
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37. Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Table of Contents 824 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) ............................................................................................. 824 37.1.1 Special Auxiliary Relay (M8000 to M8511) ......................................................................................... 824 37.1.2 Special Data Register (D8000 to D8511)..............
PAGE 15
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Appendix B: Instruction Execution Time Appendix B-1 Appendix B-2 Appendix B-3 Appendix B-4 Appendix B-5 Appendix B-6 Table of Contents 917 Basic Instruction Execution Time ........................................................................................ 917 Step Ladder Instruction Execution Time.............................................................................. 925 Label (P/I) Execution Time ....
PAGE 16
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Related manuals Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Related manuals For detailed explanation of programming (basic instructions, applied instructions and step ladder instructions) in FX3S/ FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, refer to this manual. For hardware information on the PLC main unit, special extension units, etc., refer to each associated manual. For acquiring manuals, contact the representative you have purchased the product from.
PAGE 17
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Related manuals Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition ~ Essential manual Manual required depending on application Manual name Manual number U Manual with additional manual for detailed explanation Contents Model name code Programming ~ Additional Manual FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition (this manual) Additional Manual MELSEC-Q/L/F Structured Programming Manual (Fundamentals) Additional M
PAGE 18
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Related manuals Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition ~ Essential manual Manual required depending on application Manual name Manual number U Manual with additional manual for detailed explanation Contents Model name code Ethernet, CC-Link, MELSEC I/O LINK and AS-i system When using each product, refer also to the User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of the PLC main unit to which each product is connected.
PAGE 19
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Related manuals Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition ~ Essential manual Manual required depending on application U Manual with additional manual for detailed explanation Manual number Contents Model name code Supplied FX3UC-4AD with product Installation Manual JY997D14901 Handling procedures of the 4-channel analog input special function block. For use, refer to the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series User’s Manual - Analog Control Edition.
PAGE 20
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Related manuals Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition ~ Essential manual Manual required depending on application Manual name Manual number U Manual with additional manual for detailed explanation Contents Model name code Analog I/O (mixed) When using each product, refer also to the User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of the PLC main unit to which each product is connected.
PAGE 21
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Related manuals Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition ~ Essential manual Manual required depending on application Manual number Manual name U Manual with additional manual for detailed explanation Contents Model name code Programmable cam switch When using each product, refer also to the User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of the PLC main unit to which each product is connected.
PAGE 22
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Related manuals Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition ~ Essential manual Manual required depending on application Manual name U Manual with additional manual for detailed explanation Manual number Contents Model name code Memory cassette U Memory cassette Supplied FX3G-EEPROM-32L with product Installation Manual JY997D32401 Specifications and operating procedures of the memory cassette.
PAGE 23
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals Abbreviation/generic name Name Programmable controllers FX3S Series FX3S PLC or main unit FX3G Series FX3G PLC or main unit FX3GC Series FX3GC PLC or main unit FX3U Series FX3U PLC or main unit FX3UC Series FX3UC PLC or main unit Generic name of FX3S Series PLCs Generic name of FX3S Series PLC main units Generic name
PAGE 24
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Abbreviation/generic name CC-Link/LT equipment Name Generic name of CC-Link/LT master station, CC-Link/LT remote I/O stations, CC-Link/LT remote device stations, power supply adapters, and dedicated power supplies CC-Link/LT master Generic name of built-in type CC-Link/LT master and (additional) CC-Link/LT master Built-in type CC-Link/LT master Generic name of bu
PAGE 25
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 1 Introduction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1.1 Programming Language in PLCs 1 Introduction 1. Introduction 1.1 Programming Language in PLCs This section explains the features of programming in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. 3 Types of programming languages Instruction List 1.1.1 2 Overview This chapter explains basic items related to programming in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC programmable controllers (PLCs).
PAGE 26
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 1 Introduction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1.1 Programming Language in PLCs 4. ST (structured text) 1) Features The ST language is a text language with a similar grammatical structure to the C language. The ST language can describe control achieved by syntax using selective branches with conditional statements and repetition by repetitive statements in the same way as high-level languages such as the C language.
PAGE 27
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.1 Introduction of Convenient Functions 1 Introduction 2. Overview (Sequence Program) 2.1 Introduction of Convenient Functions 3 FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs have the following instruction functions. Instruction List 2.1.1 Convenient functions for input processing 1.
PAGE 28
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.1 Introduction of Convenient Functions 5. Three types of "interrupt" functions for receiving short-period pulses and priority processing → Refer to Chapter 36. *1 1) Input interrupt Signals from specific input relays are monitored. At the rising edge or falling edge of the monitored input, a specified interrupt routine is executed with highest priority.
PAGE 29
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2 Overview (Sequence Program) 2.2 Introduction of Applied Instructions 1 The entry code can be registered to prevent erroneous read/incorrect write protection of created sequence programs. With regard to online operations from GX Works2, GX Developer (Ver. 8.24A or later) and handy programming panels, the program protection level can be set by the entry code specification method.
PAGE 30
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3. Arithmetic and logical operations • Addition (ADD/FNC 20) 2.2 Introduction of Applied Instructions 7.
PAGE 31
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 Analog/Positioning Special Control Introduction 2.3 2.3 Analog/Positioning Special Control For details, refer to the manual of each product. 1. Analog I/O control • Analog input • Pt100 temperature sensor input • Thermocouple temperature sensor input • Block dedicated to temperature control 2.
PAGE 32
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.5 2.5 Introduction of Devices Constructing PLC Introduction of Devices Constructing PLC Many relays, timers, and counters are built into an FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, with many NO (normally open) contacts and NC (normally closed) contacts. These contacts and coils are connected to make a sequence circuit.
PAGE 33
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 Device list 1. Input relays (X) and output relays (Y) → Refer to Section 4.2. → Refer to Section 4.3. • Relays built into the PLC are auxiliary relays, and are used for programs. Different from I/O relays, auxiliary relays cannot receive external inputs or directly drive external loads. For latched (battery or EEPROM backed) counters → Refer to Section 4.6.
PAGE 34
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8. Index registers (V)(Z) → Refer to Section 4.11. Among registers, there are index type registers V and Z used for modification. A data register V or Z is added to another device as follows: [In the case of "V0, Z0 = 5"] D100V0 = D105, C20Z0 = C25 ← Device number + V or Z value Data registers and index registers are used for indirectly specifying the set value of timers and counters, or used in applied instructions.
PAGE 35
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Program Memory and Devices 2.6.1 Memory structure 1 Introduction 2.6 2.6 Program Memory and Devices 2 1. In FX3S PLC Overview FX3S PLC are equipped with the EEPROM memory as standard.
PAGE 36
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.6 Program Memory and Devices 2. In FX3G/FX3GC PLCs FX3G/FX3GC PLCs are equipped with the EEPROM memory as standard.
PAGE 37
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.6 Program Memory and Devices 1 Introduction 3. In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs FX3U/FX3UC PLCs are equipped with the RAM memory as standard. By mounting a memory cassette, the memory type can be changed.
PAGE 38
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.6.2 2.6 Program Memory and Devices Memory operations and latched (battery or EEPROM backed) devices (power ON/OFF and RUN/STOP) 1. Backup operation The operations of the data memory, bit device memory and program memory in FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs are classified as shown below: 1) Types of program memory Item Power OFF→ON Power OFF Parameter Does not change.
PAGE 39
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.6 Program Memory and Devices 1 Item General type Cleared.*1 Latched (EEPROM backed) type Extension register (R) General type File type Index register (V, Z) V, Z Cleared.*1 Does not change.*2 Does not change. For 10 ms Cleared. Cleared. Does not change. Does not change. Does not change. Cleared. Does not change while M8033 is ON. Does not change. Cleared.
PAGE 40
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.6 Program Memory and Devices c) FX3U/FX3UC PLCs Item General type Data register (D) Extension file register (ER)*4 Index register (V, Z) Timer present value register (T) *4. Does not change. Cleared. Does not change while M8033 is ON. File type Does not change.*2 Cleared. Set to initial values.*3 Latched (battery backed) type Does not change.*3 Does not change.
PAGE 41
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.6 Program Memory and Devices 1 Types of bit device memory a) FX3S PLC Item Power OFF Cleared. Output relay (Y) General type state relay (S) Cleared. Set to initial values.*1 Cleared. Does not change. Cleared. Cleared. Cleared. Does not change. Does not change while M8033 is ON. Does not change. Does not change. Cleared. Does not change while M8033 is ON.
PAGE 42
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.6 Program Memory and Devices b) FX3G/FX3GC PLCs Item Power OFF Input relay (X) Cleared. Output relay (Y) Contact image memory (X, Y, M, S) General type auxiliary relay (M) Power OFF→ON General type state relay (S) 40 Cleared. Does not change. Cleared. Does not change. Cleared.*1 Does not change. Cleared. Set to initial values.*2 Does not change.*2 Cleared.
PAGE 43
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.6 Program Memory and Devices 1 Item Power OFF Input relay (X) Cleared. Does not change. Cleared. Set to initial values.*1 Cleared. Does not change. Cleared. Does not change. 5 Cleared. Does not change while M8033 is ON. Does not change. Cleared. Does not change while M8033 is ON. Retentive type for 100 ms Does not change. Retentive type for 1 ms Does not change.
PAGE 44
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.6.3 2.6 Program Memory and Devices Types of backup methods against power failure There are the following types of latch (battery backup) for the program memory and built-in PLC devices. 1. Battery backup method a) FX3G/FX3GC PLCs Item Description Latched contents The optional battery backs up the RAM memory built in the PLC and clock data.
PAGE 45
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 Change between general devices and latched (battery backed) devices Introduction 2.6.4 2.6 Program Memory and Devices 1. When using latched (battery backed) type devices as non-latch type devices 2. When using non-latch type devices as latched (battery backed) type devices 2.6.
PAGE 46
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters Types and Setting of Parameters Setting of parameters means setting the environment where the PLC operates. Almost all FX PLC can be used with factory default values. However, when it is necessary to attach a memory cassette, set the comment capacity, set the communication condition for serial ports, etc.
PAGE 47
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters 1 PLC system setting Constant setting This parameter sets interrupt inputs for the maximum speed, bias speed, creep speed, zero return speed, acceleration time, deceleration time, and the DVIT instruction. It is necessary to set the memory capacity. Detailed setting This parameter sets the operation table.
PAGE 48
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2) 2.
PAGE 49
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.
PAGE 50
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7.3 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters Memory capacity setting range Cautions on setting the memory capacity • After changing the memory capacity setting, make sure to write both the programs and parameters to the PLC. If only the parameters are written to the PLC, program errors (such as parameter error, circuit error and grammar error) may occur in the PLC.
PAGE 51
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.
PAGE 52
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7.5 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters Keyword (entry code) By registering the entry code in a PLC, the functions of programming tools, display modules, and display units to change programs, monitor devices, and the current value changing function in the PLC can be restricted (access restriction).
PAGE 53
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters 1 Setting status Peripheral equipment and access restriction The programming tool performs the following operations in accordance with the selected registration condition: Once the permanent PLC lock is set, it cannot be reset. To reset the permanent PLC lock or write programs again to the PLC, all-clear the PLC memory.
PAGE 54
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters Registering and changing the entry codes This section explains the operating procedure of GX Works2, GX Developer. → For the entry code registration/change procedure in FX-10P(-E), FX-20P(-E), FX-30P, and FX-PCS/WIN(-E), refer to the manual of each product. 1. Set the PLC to the STOP mode. 2. Open New keyword registration dialog box.
PAGE 55
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters 1 Introduction • GX Developer 2 Overview 3 Instruction List Set item Keyword Input Select one of the following. • Keyword Protection • Permanent PLC Lock Remarks When "Permanent PLC lock" is selected, it cannot be reset. To reset the permanent PLC lock or write programs again to the PLC, all-clear the PLC memory. Keyword Input 8 characters.
PAGE 56
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2 Overview (Sequence Program) 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters • GX Developer Click [Execution] button to open Keyword confirmation dialog box. Enter the same keyword again, and click the [OK] button to register the keyword to the PLC. When "Permanent PLC Lock" is selected, however, the following dialog box appears when the [Execute] button is clicked. Click the [OK] button to register protection to the PLC.
PAGE 57
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters 1 This section explains the operating procedure of GX Works2, GX Developer. → For the program reading/writing procedure in FX-10P(-E), FX-20P(-E), FX-30P, and FX-PCS/WIN(-E), refer to the manual of each product. 1. Select [Online]→[Read from PLC...]/[Write to PLC...] to open Input current keyword dialog box.
PAGE 58
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters Canceling the entry codes This section explains the operating procedure of GX Works2, GX Developer. → For the entry code canceling (deletion) procedure in FX-10P(-E), FX-20P(-E), FX-30P, and FX-PCS/WIN(-E), refer to the manual of each product. 1. Set the PLC to the STOP mode. 2. Open Keyword cancel dialog box.
PAGE 59
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters 1 This section explains the operating procedure of GX Works2, GX Developer. → For the entry code reset procedure in FX-10P(-E), FX-20P(-E), FX-30P, and FX-PCS/WIN(-E), refer to the manual of each product. 1. Open Keyword disable dialog box.
PAGE 60
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7.6 2 Overview (Sequence Program) 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters Special unit initial value setting The initial values of the buffer memory (BFM) in special function units/blocks connected to an FX3UC PLC Ver.2.20 or later and FX3U PLC can be set as a parameter in GX Works2 or GX Developer.
PAGE 61
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 Introduction 2 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters Setting memory capacity 2 Overview 3 Instruction List 4 Contents of setting Comments Capacity Set the capacity of comments to be stored in the PLC.
PAGE 62
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters Setting devices 1. Click [Device] tab, and set devices. Set item 4 Contents of setting Setting range Supplemental Relay Set the latched (battery backed) auxiliary relay range. Initial value: 500 to 1023 0 to 1023 State Set the latched (battery backed) state relay range.
PAGE 63
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters 1 Setting special function block 1. Click the [Special Function Block] tab, and then set the special function unit/block and built-in CC-Link/LT. 2 Overview In order to use the "Special Function Block" field, the "Special Function Block Settings" box in the [Memory Capacity] tab must be checked first.
PAGE 64
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters 2. On Special Function Block Settings dialog box, set the initial values of special function units/ blocks. Set item Contents of setting Setting range Unit No. tab Select the unit number of a special function unit/block to be set. – Unit Name Set the name of a special function unit/block whose initial values are to be set. No.
PAGE 65
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 Introduction 6 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters Set the Built-in CC-Link/LT 1. Set the built-in CC-Link/LT on the Built-in CC-Link/LT Setting dialog box. 2 Overview 3 Instruction List 4 Contents of setting Setting range Transmission Speed Select one of the following supported built-in CC-Link/LT transmission rates: 2.
PAGE 66
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters Setting the PLC system (1) Click on the [PLC System(1)] tab to setup "Battery Less Mode", "Battery Mode", "MODEM Initialized", and "RUN Terminal Input". 1) FX3S/FX3U/FX3UC PLC 2) FX3G/FX3GC PLCs Set item Contents of setting Setting range Battery Less Mode*1 Select this to operate the PLC without using the battery.
PAGE 67
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 Introduction 8 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters Setting the PLC system (2) 1. Click [PLC System(2)] tab. 2 Overview 2. Only when a latch (battery backed) area for a serial port exists through an extended PLC, select a channel to be set and put a check mark next to "Operate Communication Setting".
PAGE 68
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters Setting positioning 1. Click [Positioning] tab. In order to use the [Positioning] tab, the "Positioning Instruction Settings" box in the [Memory Capacity] tab must be checked first. 2. Set the positioning constants in TBL (FNC152) instruction. → For TBL (FNC152) instruction, refer to the Positioning Control Manual.
PAGE 69
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters 1 Contents of setting Set range Bias Speed [Hz] Set the bias speed for each set of output pulses. Initial value: 0 Max. Speed [Hz] Set the maximum speed for each set of output pulses. Initial value: 100,000 Creep Speed [Hz] Set the creep speed in DSZR (FNC150) instruction for each set of output pulses.
PAGE 70
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters 3. Click [Individual setting] button to display Positioning Instruction Settings dialog box. In this dialog box, set the positioning table for each pulse output destination. Set item Contents of setting Setting range Y0 Set the positioning table for the pulse output destination Y000.
PAGE 71
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters 1 Contents of setting Setting range Positioning table settings will not be initialized when the PLC is powered on A check mark here means not to transfer the positioning setting when PLC turns ON. Check mark this box when changing the positioning setting from a display unit, etc., and then using the changed contents even after restoring power.
PAGE 72
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 3 Instruction List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3. 3.1 Basic Instructions Instruction List This chapter introduces a list of instructions available in programming. 3.1 Basic Instructions The basic instructions are provided in the following series. The table below shows differences in applicable devices. Applicable PLC FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC Ver. 2.30 or later Ver. 2.
PAGE 73
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 3 Instruction List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.1 Basic Instructions 1 Name Symbol Function Applicable devices Reference Connection Instruction AND Block Serial connection of multiple parallel circuits – Section 7.7 ORB OR Block Parallel connection of multiple contact circuits – Section 7.
PAGE 74
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 3 Instruction List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.2 Step Ladder Instructions Mnemonic Name STL Step Ladder RET Return 3.3 3.2 Step Ladder Instructions Symbol Function STL Applicable devices RET Applicable devices Starts step ladder Reference S Chapter 35 Completes step ladder – Chapter 35 Applied Instructions ...
PAGE 75
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 3 Instruction List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC Number 1 – – – Section 9.4 2 Complement – – – Section 9.5 Overview FX2NC FX1NC Shift Move FX2N FX1N Reference FX1S FX3UC FX3U FX3GC Function FX3S Symbol FX3G Mnemonic Introduction Applicable PLC FNC No.
PAGE 76
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 3 Instruction List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC Number Applicable PLC FX2NC FX2N FX1NC FX1N FX1S FX3UC FX3U Function FX3GC Symbol FX3S Mnemonic FX3G FNC No. Reference Rotation and Shift Operation 34 SFTR SFTR S D n1 n2 Bit Shift Right Section 11.5 35 SFTL SFTL Bit Shift Left Section 11.6 36 WSFR WSFR S D n1 n2 Word Shift Right – – – Section 11.
PAGE 77
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 3 Instruction List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC Number 1 FX1NC – – FX2NC FX1N – FX2N FX1S FX3UC FX3U FX3GC Function FX3S Symbol FX3G Mnemonic Reference Introduction Applicable PLC FNC No. High-speed Processing 56 SPD SPD 57 PLSY 58 59 HSZ S1 S2 S D High-speed Counter Zone Compare Section 13.6 Speed Detection Section 13.
PAGE 78
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 3 Instruction List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC Number Applicable PLC FX1NC – – – – Section 15.6 ASC ASCII Code Data Input – – – – – – Section 15.7 Print (ASCII Code) – – – – – – Section 15.8 FROM m1 m2 D n Read From A Special Function Block – – Section 15.9 TO TO m1 m2 S n Write To A Special Function Block – – Section 15.
PAGE 79
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 3 Instruction List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC Number 1 FX1NC – – – – – – Section 18.6 119 EBIN EBIN Scientific Notation to Floating Point Conversion – – – – – – Section 18.
PAGE 80
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 3 Instruction List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC Number Applicable PLC FX3GC FX3UC FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC BYTE to WORD – – – *5 – – – – – Section 19.3 S D n 4-bit Linking of Word Data – – – *5 – – – – – Section 19.4 S D n 4-bit Grouping of Word Data – – – *5 – – – – – Section 19.
PAGE 81
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 3 Instruction List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC Number 1 FX2NC FX1NC 170 GRY GRY S D Decimal to Gray Code Conversion – – – Section 22.1 171 GBIN GBIN S D Gray Code to Decimal Conversion – – – Section 22.2 176 RD3A 177 WR3A FX2N FX1N Reference FX1S FX3UC FX3U FX3GC Function FX3S Symbol FX3G Mnemonic Introduction Applicable PLC FNC No.
PAGE 82
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 3 Instruction List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC Number Applicable PLC FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC – – – – – – – – Section 26.3 Character String Length Detection – – – – – – – – Section 26.4 FX3UC Link Character Strings Function FX3U FX3GC Symbol FX3S Mnemonic FX3G FNC No.
PAGE 83
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 3 Instruction List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC Number 1 FX2NC FX2N FX1NC FX1N FX1S FX3UC FX3U FX3GC Function FX3S Symbol FX3G Mnemonic Reference Introduction Applicable PLC FNC No. Data Comparison AND Compare AND< S1 S2 236 AND<> AND<> S1 S2 237 AND<= AND<= S1 S2 238 AND>= 240 OR= AND>= S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 ≥ S2 Section 28.3 4 Section 28.3 Section 28.
PAGE 84
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 3 Instruction List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC Number Applicable PLC FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC Reference FX1S FX3UC FX3U Function FX3GC Symbol FX3S Mnemonic FX3G FNC No. 271 IVDR IVDR S1 S2 S3 n Inverter Drive *6 – – – – – Section 30.2 272 IVRD IVRD S1 S2 D n Inverter Parameter Read *6 – – – – – Section 30.
PAGE 85
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.1 Device Number List 1 Introduction 4. Devices in Detail 4.1 2 Overview This chapter explains how numeric values are handled in the PLC as well as the roles and functions of various built-in devices including I/O relays, auxiliary relays, state relays, counters and data registers. The following content provides a basis for handling the PLC.
PAGE 86
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.
PAGE 87
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.1 Device Number List 1 FX3G/FX3GC PLCs Device name Description Reference I/O relay X000 to X177 128 points Output relay Y000 to Y177 128 points General type M0 to M383 384 points EEPROM keep type M384 to M1535 Device numbers are octal. The total number of inputs and outputs is 128. Section 4.
PAGE 88
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.1 Device Number List Device name Description Reference Data register (32 bits when used in pair form) General type (16 bits) D0 to D127 128 points EEPROM keep type (16 bits) D128 to D1099 972 points General type (16 bits)*1 D1100 to D7999 6900 points Section 4.
PAGE 89
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.1 Device Number List 1 FX3U/FX3UC PLCs Device name Description Reference Device numbers are octal. The total number of inputs and outputs is 256. Section 4.
PAGE 90
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.1 Device Number List Device name Description Reference High-speed counter 1-phase 1-counting input Bi-directional (32 bits) C235 to C245 1-phase 2-counting input Bi-directional (32 bits) C246 to C250 2-phase 2-counting input Bi-directional (32 bits) C251 to C255 8 points maximum can be used among C235 to C255 [latched (battery backed) type].
PAGE 91
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 I/O Relays [X, Y] Some input relays and output relays are secured in the main unit, and others are assigned to extension devices according to the connection order. Because I/O replays are numbered in octal, numeric values such as "8" and "9" do not exist. Numbers of I/O relays The table below shows input relay (X) and output relays (Y) numbering (Relay numbers are assigned in octal.
PAGE 92
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.2.2 4.2 I/O Relays [X, Y] Functions and roles Examples of terminal names and wiring (sink input) are for the FX3U Series PLC. 0V External power supply COM1 24V Input signal Program example X000 X001 S/S X000 Y000 X000 Input terminal Load Y000 NO contact X000 PLC The PLC receives signals from external switches through input terminals.
PAGE 93
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 Operation timing of I/O relays The PLC executes sequence control by repeatedly executing the following processing procedure. In this batch I/O method, not only are there driving times of input filters and output devices but also response delays caused by operation cycles. (Refer to Section 6.3.
PAGE 94
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.3 4.3 Auxiliary Relay [M] Auxiliary Relay [M] There are many auxiliary relays inside the PLC. Coils of auxiliary relays are driven by contacts of various devices inside the PLC in the same way as output relays. Auxiliary relays have many electronically NO contacts and NC contacts which can be used arbitrarily inside the PLC.
PAGE 95
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.3 Auxiliary Relay [M] 1 X001 M600 M600 PLC Backup against power failure (self-holding circuit) SET M600 RST M600 The figure on the left shows a circuit using the SET and RST instructions.
PAGE 96
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.4 State Relay [S] 4.4 State Relay [S] State relays (S) are important devices to program stepping type process control simply, and combined with the step ladder instruction STL. State relays can be used in the SFC (sequential function chart) programming method. → For programming by the step ladder instruction and SFC method, refer to Chapter 35. 4.4.
PAGE 97
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.4 State Relay [S] 1 Functions and operation examples Introduction 4.4.2 1. General type Initial state S 2 Start TRAN Moving down S 20 Y000 Lower limit X001 TRAN Clamping S 21 Y001 Clamping X002 Clamping TRAN S 22 Upper limit Y002 Upper limit X003 4 Devices in Detail Moving up When the PLC turns OFF, all of general type state relays are turned OFF.
PAGE 98
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.4 State Relay [S] 3. Annunciator type Annunciator type state relays can be used as outputs for external fault diagnosis. For example, when an external fault diagnosis circuit shown in the figure below is created and the contents of the special data register D8049 are monitored, the smallest number out of the active state relays S900 to S999 is stored in D8049.
PAGE 99
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 Timer [T] Timers add and count clock pulses of 1 ms, 10 ms, 100 ms, etc. inside the PLC. When the counted value reaches a specified set value, the output contact of the timer turns on. A set value can be directly specified by a constant (K) in the program memory, or indirectly specified by the contents of a data register (D). Numbers of timers 2 Overview 4.5.1 Introduction 4.5 4.
PAGE 100
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.5 Timer [T] 2. Retentive type Set value T250 K345 (constant) A data register can be Y001 specified also. X001 T250 X002 RST t2 t1 X001 Current value Y001 T250 Retentive time t1 + t2 = 34.5 sec When the drive input X001 of the timer coil T250 turns ON, the current value counter for T250 adds and counts clock pulses of 100 ms.
PAGE 101
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 Set value specification method Introduction 4.5.3 4.5 Timer [T] 1. Specifying a constant (K) X003 T10 K100 T10 is a 100 ms (0.1 sec) type timer. Constant (decimal integer) When the constant "100" is specified, T10 works as a 1010-second timer second timer (0.1 sec × 100 = 10 sec). X001 FNC 12 MOV K100 T10 4.5.
PAGE 102
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.5.6 4.5 Timer [T] Program examples [off-delay timer and flicker timer] Off-delay timer X001 T5 X001 Y000 Y000 X001 T 5 K200 T 1 K20 T 2 K10 T5 Y000 (20 sec) Flicker timer (blink) X001 X001 T2 T 1 2 sec T1 1 2 sec sec T2 T1 Y000 T 2 ( Y000 ) One operation cycle In addition, the flicker operation can be performed by the ALT (FNC 66) instruction.
PAGE 103
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 Handling timers as numeric devices In timers, the output contact operating in accordance with the set value is used in some cases, and the present value is used as numeric data for control in other cases. The figures below show the structure of the timer present value registers.
PAGE 104
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.6 Counter [C] 4.6.1 Numbers of counters 4.6 Counter [C] The table below shows counter (C) numbers. (Numbers are assigned in decimal.) 1. FX3S PLC → For high-speed counters, refer to Section 4.7.
PAGE 105
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 Related devices (to specify counting direction) [32-bit counter] When an auxiliary relay for switching the counting direction is set to ON, the counter executes down-counting, and when set to OFF, the counter executes up-counting. Counter No. Counting direction switching relay Counter No.
PAGE 106
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.6 Counter [C] 2. General type and latched (battery backed) type 32-bit bi-directional counters The valid set range of 32-bit binary bi-directional counters is from −2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 (decimal constant). The counting direction (up or down) is specified by special auxiliary relays M8200 to M8234. • When M8UUU is driven for CUUU, a counter executes down-counting.
PAGE 107
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.6 Counter [C] 1 1) Specification by constant (K) X003 C200 Constant (decimal constant): −2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 43210 counts K43,210 Indirect specification (D) X001 FNC 12 DMOV K43210 D5(D6) X003 Pairs of data registers are used for indirect specification.
PAGE 108
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.6 Counter [C] 2. Examples in applied instructions For the full use of counters as numeric devices, refer to the explanation of applied instructions later. FNC 12 MOV C 20 D 10 FNC 10 CMP K100 C 30 FNC 18 BCD C 10 K2Y000 FNC 22 MUL C 5 FNC 12 DMOV C200 D0(D1) FNC 11 DZCP K100 K20000 C200 C20 (current value) is transferred to D10.
PAGE 109
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs) High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs) 4.7.1 Types and device numbers of high-speed counters Introduction 4.7 1 2 1. Types of high-speed counters Overview The main unit has built-in 32-bit high-speed bi-directional counters (1-phase 1-count, 1-phase 2-count and 2-phase 2count).
PAGE 110
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs) 5. High-speed counter device list Classification 1-phase 1-count input 1-phase 2-count input Counter No.
PAGE 111
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 Input assignment for high-speed counters Inputs X000 to X007 are assigned as shown in the table below according to each high-speed counter number. When a high-speed counter is used, the filter constant of a corresponding input number in the main unit automatically changes.
PAGE 112
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7.3 4.7 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs) Handling of high-speed counters High-speed counters in FX3G/FX3GC PLCs operate in the same way as high-speed counters in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs. For details, refer to Subsection 4.8.3. 4.7.4 Current value update timing and comparison of current value 1.
PAGE 113
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs) 1 Type 1-phase 2-counting input Monitoring device C246 M8246 C247 M8247 C248 M8248 C249 M8249 C250 M8250 C251 M8251 C252 M8252 C253 M8253 C254 M8254 C255 M8255 OFF ON 2 Up-counting Overview 2-phase 2-counting input Counter No. Introduction 2.
PAGE 114
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7.7 4.7 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs) Response frequency of high-speed counters 1. Response frequency and overall frequency When any of the following functions/instructions is used, the overall frequency is restricted regardless of the operand of the instruction.
PAGE 115
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs) 1 Example1: When the HSCS, HSCR or HSZ instruction is not used, and the instructions related to the number of positioning axes (DRVI instruction [Y000], DRVA instruction [Y001]) are used in the FX3G PLC Introduction 3.
PAGE 116
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7.8 4.7 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs) Cautions on use • For a contact to drive the coil of a high-speed counter, use a contact which is normally ON during high-speed counting. Example: M8000 (RUN monitor NO contact) X000 C235 Program a contact which is normally ON during counting.
PAGE 117
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs) 1) Program example X010*1 2) K0 C235 The current value of C235 is cleared (to "0"). 2 When the driving contact is the continuous execution type, the current value of the counter is reset to "0" at each scan while X010 remains ON.
PAGE 118
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.8 4.8 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC) High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC) High-speed counter only available in DC input type main units. 4.8.1 Types and device numbers of high-speed counters 1. Types of high-speed counters The main unit has built-in 32-bit high-speed bi-directional counters (1-phase 1-count, 1-phase 2-count and 2-phase 2count).
PAGE 119
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.8 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC) 1 Classification Counter No.
PAGE 120
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.8.2 4.8 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC) Input assignment for high-speed counters Inputs X000 to X007 are assigned as shown in the table below according to each high-speed counter number. When a high-speed counter is used, the filter constant of a corresponding input number in the main unit automatically changes (X000 to X005: 5 µs, X006 and X007: 50 µs).
PAGE 121
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.8 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC) 1 • Inputs X000 to X007 are used for high-speed counters, input interrupt, pulse catch, SPD/ZRN/DSZR/DVIT instructions and general-purpose inputs. When assigning functions, there should be no overlap between those input terminals. 4.8.3 Handling of high-speed counters 1.
PAGE 122
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4 Devices in Detail 4.8 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC) 2. 1-phase 2-count input These counters are 32-bit binary bi-directional counters, and the operation of the output contact for the current value is equivalent to that in 1-phase 1-count input type high-speed counters described above.
PAGE 123
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.
PAGE 124
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.8.5 4.8 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC) Related devices 1. Devices used to switch the counting direction of 1-phase 1-count input counters Type Counter No. Specifying device C235 M8235 C236 M8236 C237 M8237 C238 M8238 C239 M8239 C240 M8240 C241 M8241 C242 M8242 C243 M8243 C244 M8244 C245 M8245 1-phase 1-counting input Up-counting Down-counting OFF ON 2.
PAGE 125
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 Changing the logic of external reset input signal The counters C241 to C245, C247 to C250 and C252 to C255 are usually reset when the external reset input turns ON. By using the program shown below, the logic can be inverted so that these counters are reset when the external reset input turns OFF.
PAGE 126
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.8.8 4.8 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC) How to use 2-phase 2-count input counters C251 to C255 with 4 edge counting For the 2-phase 2-count input counters C251 to C255, the edge count is usually set to 1. By using the programs shown in the table below, the edge count may be set to 4. Counter No.
PAGE 127
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 Conditions for hardware counters to be handled as software counters High-speed counters are classified into hardware counters and software counters. In some conditions, however, hardware counters are handled as software counters. In this case, use hardware counters within the range of maximum response frequency and total frequency as determined for software counters. Hardware counter No.
PAGE 128
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.8.10 4.8 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC) Response frequency of high-speed counters 1. Response frequency of hardware counters The table below shows the maximum response frequency of hardware counters.
PAGE 129
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.
PAGE 130
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.8.11 4.8 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC) Cautions on use • For a contact to drive the coil of a high-speed counter, use a contact which is normally ON during high-speed counting. Example: M8000 (RUN monitor NO contact) X000 C235 Program a contact which is normally ON during counting.
PAGE 131
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.8 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC) 1) Program example X010*1 2) K0 C235 The current value of C235 is cleared (to "0"). 2 When the driving contact is the continuous execution type, the current value of the counter is reset to "0" at each scan while X010 remains ON.
PAGE 132
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.9 4.9 Data Register and File Register [D] Data Register and File Register [D] Data registers are devices for storing numeric data. File registers are handled as the initial values of data registers. Each data register or file register stores 16-bit data (whose most significant bit specifies the positive or negative sign).
PAGE 133
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.9 Data Register and File Register [D] 1 Structures of data registers and file registers 1) Introduction 16-bit type One (16-bit) data register or file register can store a numeric value ranging from -32,768 to +32,767.
PAGE 134
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.9.3 4.9 Data Register and File Register [D] Functions and operation examples of data registers Data registers are devices for storing numeric data. Each data register stores 16-bit data (whose most significant bit specifies the positive or negative sign). Two data registers combined can store 32-bit numeric data (whose most significant bit specifies the positive or negative sign). 1.
PAGE 135
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.9 Data Register and File Register [D] 1 Data registers can be used in various control with numeric data. This section explains the operations of representative basic instructions and applied instructions among various applications. For the full use of data registers, refer to the explanation of applied instructions later.
PAGE 136
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.9.4 4.9 Data Register and File Register [D] Functions and operation examples of file registers A file register is a device for setting the initial value of a data register with the same number. Each file register stores 16-bit data (whose most significant bit specifies the positive or negative sign).
PAGE 137
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.
PAGE 138
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.9 Data Register and File Register [D] 3. Data register → File register When a file register (D1000 or later) is specified for the destination of BMOV (FNC 15) instruction, it is possible to directly write data to the file register area [A] inside the program memory.
PAGE 139
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.
PAGE 140
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.10 4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER] Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER] Extension registers (R) are the extended form of data registers (D). The contents of extension registers (R) can be stored in extension file registers (ER). In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, extension file registers (ER) are available only while the memory cassette is attached. 4.10.
PAGE 141
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 Structures of extension registers and extension file registers One extension register consists of 16 bits. Extension registers can be used in 16-bit and 32-bit applied instructions in the same way as data registers. 1) 16-bit type One extension register (consisting of 16 bits) can handle a numeric ranging from −32768 to +32767.
PAGE 142
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.10.5 4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER] Functions and operation examples of extension registers Extension registers can be used in various controls with numeric data the same as data registers. This subsection explains operations in representative basic instructions and applied instructions among various applications.
PAGE 143
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 Functions and operation examples of extension file registers Extension file registers (ER) are usually used as log data storage destinations and set data storage destinations. Extension file registers can be handled only with dedicated instructions shown in the table below.
PAGE 144
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.
PAGE 145
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 Cautions on using extension file registers Introduction 4.10.7 4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER] 1.
PAGE 146
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.10.8 4 Devices in Detail 4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER] Registration of data in extension registers and extension file registers This subsection explains the operating procedures of GX Works2. → For details on GX Developer operating procedures, refer to GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual. 1 Setting the project type, PLC type and programming language Select [Project]→[New].
PAGE 147
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER] 1 Introduction 2 4 Devices in Detail Creating the device memory This operation is not required when using the device memory offered as the default. 1. Right-click [Device Memory] in the project data list to open the submenu. 2 3. Input the data name, and click the [OK] button to display the dialog box for Device Memory. Overview 2.
PAGE 148
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3 4 Devices in Detail 4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER] Setting the data 1. Select [Edit]→[Input Device] to open the Input Device dialog box. 2. Set the "Device", "Range", "Display Mode" and "Register". 3. Set the data.
PAGE 149
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER] 1 Introduction 4 4 Devices in Detail Writing (transferring) the data to the PLC 1. Select [Online]→[Write to PLC] to open the Online Data Operation dialog box. 2. Check the Device Memory to Write (transfer) the data. 2 Overview 3 Instruction List 4 Devices in Detail 5 Specified the Device & Constant 3.
PAGE 150
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.11 4.11 Index Register [V and Z] Index Register [V and Z] Index registers can be used in the same way as of data registers. But they are special registers since they can change the contents of device numbers and numeric values by program when combined with another device number or numeric value in operands of applied instructions. 4.11.
PAGE 151
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Pointer [P and I] 4.12.1 Numbers of pointers 1 Introduction 4.12 4.12 Pointer [P and I] 1.
PAGE 152
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.12 Pointer [P and I] • Role of pointer P63 for jump to the END step FNC 00 CJ Label P63 P63 is a special pointer for jumping to the END step when the CJ (FNC 00) instruction is executed. Note that a program error will occur when P63 is programmed as a label. → Refer to "5. Label unnecessary for the pointer P63" in Section 8.1. P 63 END Should not be programmed. 4.12.
PAGE 153
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.12 Pointer [P and I] 1 FNC 04 EI Interrupt enabled range • Interrupt is usually disabled in the PLC. If interrupt is enabled by EI instruction, when X000 or X001 turns ON while a program is scanned, the PLC executes the interrupt routine [1] or [2], and then returns to the main program by IRET instruction.
PAGE 154
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.12 Pointer [P and I] Operations Step 0 FNC 04 EI • Timer interrupt is enabled after EI instruction. It is not necessary to program DI (disable interrupt) instruction when no zone to disable timer interrupt is needed. Interrupt is enabled Main program FNC 06 FEND Pointer for interrupt Main program is finished • "FEND" indicates the end of the main program.
PAGE 155
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions 5.
PAGE 156
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.1.2 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions 5.
PAGE 157
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 Handling of numeric values in floating point operations Introduction 5.1.3 5.1 Numeric Values Handled in PLC (Octal, Decimal, Hexadecimal and Real Numbers) 3 When handling a binary floating point (real number) in data registers, use a pair of data registers having consecutive device numbers.
PAGE 158
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.1 Numeric Values Handled in PLC (Octal, Decimal, Hexadecimal and Real Numbers) Scientific notation (real number) Because binary floating point (real number) is difficult to understand for users, it can be converted into scientific notation (real number). But internal operations are executed using binary floating point (real number).
PAGE 159
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 Specification of Constants K, H and E (Decimal, Hexadecimal and Real Number) Introduction 5.2 5.2 Specification of Constants K, H and E (Decimal, Hexadecimal and Real Number) 5.2.1 Constant K (decimal number) - When word data (16 bits) is used ...... K-32768 to K32767 - When double data (32 bits) is used ...
PAGE 160
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.3 5.3 Character Strings Character Strings Character strings are classified into character string constants which directly specify character strings in operands in applied instructions and character string data. 5.3.1 Character string constant ("ABC") A device "character string" directly specifies a character string in a sequence program.
PAGE 161
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 Specification of Digits for Bit Devices (Kn[ ]***) Introduction 5.4 5.
PAGE 162
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.5 5.5 Bit Specification of a Word Device (D[ ].b) Bit Specification of a Word Device (D[ ].b) By specifying a bit of a word device, the specified bit can be used as bit data. When specifying a bit of a word device, use a word device number and bit number (hexadecimal). (Example: D0.0 ... Indicates the bit 0 of data register (D).
PAGE 163
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 Indexing Introduction 5.7 5.7 Indexing The functions and structures of index registers are explained in detail in "4.11 Index Register [V and Z]". Refer to Section 4.11 in advance. 5.7.
PAGE 164
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.7.2 5.7 Indexing Indexing in applied instructions Expression of applied instructions allowing indexing In the explanation of applied instructions, " " is added to the source S or destination D symbol to indicate operands allowing indexing as shown in the figure below so that such operands can be discriminated from operands not allowing indexing.
PAGE 165
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.7 Indexing 1 1) When even if a numeric value written to index registers does not exceed the 16-bit numeric value range (0 to 32767), make sure to overwrite both V and Z using a 32-bit instruction. If only Z is overwritten and another numeric value remains in V, the numeric value will be extremely large. Thus an operation error occurs.
PAGE 166
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.7.3 5.7 Indexing Indexing example for instruction with limited number of use. By modifying the target device numbers using index registers V and Z, the target device numbers can be changed using the program. In this way, an instruction with a limited number of uses per program can be used with multiple devices.
PAGE 167
5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 5.7 Indexing Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 Introduction MEMO 2 Overview 3 Instruction List 4 Devices in Detail 5 Specified the Device & Constant 6 Before Programming 7 Basic Instruction 8 FNC00-FNC09 Program Flow 9 FNC10-FNC19 Move & Compare 10 FNC20-FNC29 Arith.
PAGE 168
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 6 What to Understand before Programming Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.1 How to Read Explanation of Instructions 6. What to Understand before Programming This chapter explains the I/O processing, relationship among instructions and programming method which should be understood before creating sequence programs. 6.1 How to Read Explanation of Instructions In this manual, applied instructions are explained in the following form.
PAGE 169
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 6 What to Understand before Programming Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.1 How to Read Explanation of Instructions 1 1. Instruction format 1) The applied instruction number (FNC No.) and instruction mnemonic are indicated. The table below shows the meaning of simplified expression. Description Applicable instruction (example) No.
PAGE 170
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 6 What to Understand before Programming Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.1 How to Read Explanation of Instructions Applicable devices Devices which can be specified in operands of instructions are shown. When a device supports an instruction, " " is added to the device. 1) Bit devices •X : Input relay (X) •Y : Output relay (Y) •M : Auxiliary relay (M) •S : State relay (S) etc.
PAGE 171
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 6 What to Understand before Programming Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 Cautions on Creation of Fundamental Programs Introduction 6.2 6.2 Cautions on Creation of Fundamental Programs This section explains cautions on programming. 6.2.
PAGE 172
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 6 What to Understand before Programming Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.2.2 6.2 Cautions on Creation of Fundamental Programs Double output (double coil) operation and countermeasures 1. Operation of double outputs When a coil gives double outputs (double coils) in a sequence program, the priority is given to the latter one. Suppose that the same coil Y003 is used in two positions as shown in the figure on the right.
PAGE 173
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 6 What to Understand before Programming Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 Circuits which cannot be programmed and countermeasures Introduction 6.2.3 6.3 I/O Processing and Response Delay 1. Bridge circuit A circuit in which the current flows in both directions should be changed as shown in the figure on the right (so that a circuit without D and a circuit without B are connected in parallel).
PAGE 174
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 6 What to Understand before Programming Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.4 6.4 Mutual Relationship Among Program Flow Control Instructions Mutual Relationship Among Program Flow Control Instructions The table below shows the mutual relationship among various program flow control instructions. In the table below, " overlapped.
PAGE 175
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 6 What to Understand before Programming Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.4 Mutual Relationship Among Program Flow Control Instructions 1 Introduction 2 Overview 3:This combination can be used without any problem. × :This combination is not allowed; Operation error may be occurs. U:This combination is allowed, but is better not to be used because the operation will be complicated.
PAGE 176
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 6 What to Understand before Programming Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.5 General Rules for Applied Instructions 6.5 General Rules for Applied Instructions 6.5.1 Expression and operation type of applied instructions Instructions and operands - Both a function number FNC 00 to FNC and a symbol (mnemonic) indicating the contents are given to each applied instruction.
PAGE 177
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 6 What to Understand before Programming Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.5 General Rules for Applied Instructions 1 Applied instructions are classified into "16-bit type" or "32-bit type" by the size of handled numeric values. And by the operation type, applied instructions are classified into "continuous operation type" or "pulse operation type". Some applied instructions have every combination of this form and type, and others do not. 1.
PAGE 178
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 6 What to Understand before Programming Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.5.2 6.
PAGE 179
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 6 What to Understand before Programming Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.5 General Rules for Applied Instructions 1 When two or more applied instructions are programmed, general flags turn ON or OFF when each applied instruction turns ON.
PAGE 180
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 6 What to Understand before Programming Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.5.3 6.5 General Rules for Applied Instructions Handling of operation error flag When there is an error in the applied instruction configuration, target device or target device number range and an error occurs while operation is executed, the following flag turns ON and the error information is stored. 1.
PAGE 181
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 6 What to Understand before Programming Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 Limitation in the number of instructions and limitation in simultaneous instruction instances Introduction 6.5.5 6.5 General Rules for Applied Instructions Limitation in the number of instructions 2 Some applied instructions can only be used up to the specified number of times.
PAGE 182
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6 What to Understand before Programming 6.6 Symbolic information storage and block password 6.6 Symbolic information storage and block password 6.6.1 Storage of symbolic information The FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver. 3.00 or later can store symbolic information (data indicating the program configuration such as structure and labels).
PAGE 183
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 Introduction 7. Basic Instruction Mnemonic Name Symbol Function Applicable devices Reference 3 Contact Instruction X,Y,M,S,D .b,T,C Section 7.1 Initial logical operation contact type NC (normally closed) X,Y,M,S,D .b,T,C Section 7.1 LD Load LDI Load Inverse Applicable devices LDP Load Pulse Applicable devices Initial logical operation of rising edge pulse X,Y,M,S,D .
PAGE 184
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Mnemonic Name Symbol Function Applicable devices Reference Connection Instruction ANB AND Block Serial connection of multiple parallel circuits − Section 7.7 ORB OR Block Parallel connection of multiple contact circuits − Section 7.
PAGE 185
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 LD, LDI Introduction 7.1 7.1 LD, LDI Outline LD and LDI instructions are contacts connected to bus lines. When combined with ANB instruction described later, LD and LDI instructions can be used for the start of branches. Overview 1.
PAGE 186
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.1 LD, LDI 2. LDI instruction (initial logical operation, NC contact type) Circuit program X000 List program LDI instruction 0000 LDI X000 0001 OUT Y000 Y000 Connection to bus line Bus line Timing chart ON X000 ON ON Y000 ON 3. Indexing*1 Devices used in LD and LDI instructions allow indexing with index registers (V and Z).
PAGE 187
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 OUT Introduction 7.2 7.2 OUT Outline OUT instruction drives coils of output relays (Y), auxiliary relays (M), state relays (S), timers (T) and counters (C). 2 Basic Instruction OUT Mnemonic Operation Condition Continuous Operation Pulse (Single) Operation OUT − OUT Overview 1. Instruction format → For the number of instruction steps, refer to Section 7.16. Instruction List 2.
PAGE 188
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.2 OUT Timing chart X000 OUT instruction Y000 X001 ON ON ON ON ON ON OUT instruction M100 ON OUT instruction M101 ON 2. When a timer or counter is used The set value is required after OUT instruction for the counting coil of a timer or counter. The set value can be specified directly by a decimal number (K) or indirectly using a data register (D) or extension register (R).
PAGE 189
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.2 OUT 1 Introduction 3. Indexing *1 Devices used in OUT instruction can be indexed with index registers (V and Z). (State relays (S), special auxiliary relays (M), 32-bit counters (C), and "D .b" cannot be indexed.) Circuit program *1. Y000Z0 0000 LD X000 0001 OUT Y000Z0 The index registers V0 to V7 and Z0 to Z7 are available for indexing.
PAGE 190
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.3 7.3 AND, ANI AND, ANI Outline AND and ANI instructions connect one contact in series. The number of contacts connected in series is not limited, so AND and ANI instructions can be used consecutively as many times as necessary. Output to another coil by way of a contact after the OUT instruction is called cascade output.
PAGE 191
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.3 AND, ANI 1 Circuit program Introduction 2. ANI instruction (serial connection of NC (normally closed) contacts) List program ANI instruction X002 0000 LD X002 0001 ANI X000 0002 OUT Y003 X000 Y003 2 Contact connected in series Overview Timing chart X002 ANI instruction X000 ON ON 3 ON ON Y003 ON 4 *1 Devices in Detail 3.
PAGE 192
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.
PAGE 193
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 OR, ORI Introduction 7.4 7.4 OR, ORI Outline 2 Overview OR and ORI instructions are used to connect one contact in parallel. If two or more contacts are connected in series, use ORB instruction described later to connect such a serial circuit block to another circuit in parallel.
PAGE 194
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.4 OR, ORI 2. ORI instruction (parallel connection of NC (normally closed) contacts) Circuit program List program 0000 LD X000 0001 ORI X002 0002 OUT Y001 X000 Y001 X002 Timing chart LD instruction X000 ORI instruction X002 ON ON ON ON Y001 ON ON ON ON 3.
PAGE 195
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.4 OR, ORI 1 5. Bit specification of data register (D) A bit in data register (D) can be specified as a device used in OR and ORI instructions. Circuit program List program Y000 D0.3 This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs. 2 3 Instruction List *1. 0000 LD X000 0001 OR D0.3 0004 OUT Y000 Overview X000 When specifying a bit in data register, input ".
PAGE 196
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.5 7.5 LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, ORF LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, ORF Outline LDP, ANDP, and ORP instructions for contacts detect the rising edge, and become active during one operation cycle only at the rising edge of a specified bit device (that is, when the bit device turns from OFF to ON).
PAGE 197
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.5 LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, ORF 1 Introduction Explanation of function and operation 1.
PAGE 198
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.5 LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, ORF 2.
PAGE 199
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.5 LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, ORF 1 Introduction 4. Output drive side The following two circuits offer the same operation: X010 X010 = M6 PLS 2 M6 Overview X010 M 6 Operation cycle Operation cycle 3 In each circuit, M6 is ON during only one operation cycle when X010 turns from OFF to ON.
PAGE 200
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.5 LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, ORF 5. Differences in the operation caused by auxiliary relay (M) numbers When an auxiliary relay (M) is specified as a device in LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP and ORF instructions, the operation varies depending on the device number range as shown in the figure below.
PAGE 201
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.5 LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, ORF 1 1.
PAGE 202
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.6 7.6 ORB ORB Outline A circuit in which two or more contacts are connected in series is called serial circuit block. 1. Instruction format Basic Instruction ORB 1 step Mnemonic ORB − OR Block Operation Condition Continuous Operation Pulse (Single) Operation 2. Applicable devices Bit Devices Instruction Word Devices System User Digit Specification System User X Y M T C S D .
PAGE 203
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 ANB Introduction 7.7 7.7 ANB Outline 1. Instruction format Basic Instruction ANB 1 step Mnemonic ANB 3 Instruction List − AND Block Operation Condition Continuous Operation Pulse (Single) Operation 2. Applicable devices Bit Devices Word Devices System User Digit Specification System User X Y M T C S D .
PAGE 204
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.8 7.8 MPS, MRD, MPP MPS, MRD, MPP Outline FX3G, FX3U FX3GC and FX3UC PLCs have 11 memories called "Stack" which store the intermediate result (ON or OFF) of operations. 1.
PAGE 205
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.8 MPS, MRD, MPP 1 1) Introduction Program examples Program example 1: One stack Only one stack is used in this example.
PAGE 206
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3) 7.
PAGE 207
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 MC, MCR Introduction 7.9 7.9 MC, MCR Outline 2 Overview When MC instruction is executed, the bus line (LD or LDI point) is moved to a position after MC contact. The bus line can be returned to the original position by MCR instruction. By changing a device (Y or M) number, MC instruction can be used as many times as necessary.
PAGE 208
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.9 MC, MCR Caution 1. A circuit error (Error code: 6611) occurs when an instruction connected the bus line (such as LD and LDI) is not present just after the MC instruction. 2. Cautions on writing during RUN The PLC cannot detect errors if an instruction is added between the MC instruction and the N instruction by write during RUN.
PAGE 209
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.9 MC, MCR 1 Circuit program While X000 is OFF X000 MC M100 N0 3 M100 X001 Level N0 The bus line B is active while X000 is ON.
PAGE 210
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.10 7.10 INV INV Outline 1. Instruction Format INV instruction inverts the operation result up to just before INV instruction, and does not require device number specification. Basic Instruction INV 1 step Mnemonic Operation Condition Continuous Operation Pulse (Single) Operation INV − Inverse 2.
PAGE 211
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 MEP, MEF Introduction 7.11 7.11 MEP, MEF Outline MEP and MEF commands are instructions that change the operation results to pulses so that device numbers do not have to be specified. 2 1) MEP The operation results up to the MEP instruction become conductive when the driving contacts turn from OFF to ON.
PAGE 212
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.11 MEP, MEF Caution 1. MEP and MEF instructions may not operate normally if the indexed contact is modified and changed to pulses by sub-routine programs, the FOR and NEXT instructions, etc. 2. As the MEP and MEF instructions operate using the operation results immediately before them, use at the list program as the AND instruction.
PAGE 213
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 PLS, PLF Introduction 7.12 7.12 PLS, PLF Outline 1. Instruction format Basic Instruction PLS Mnemonic − PLS Basic Instruction PLF Mnemonic − Pulse Falling PLF 3 Instruction List Pulse Operation Condition Continuous Operation Pulse (Single) Operation Operation Condition Continuous Operation Pulse (Single) Operation 4 2.
PAGE 214
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.12 PLS, PLF 3. Output drive side The following two circuits result the same operation. X000 M1 M0 = X000 X000 PLS M0 M1 ON X000 ON during one operation cycle M 0 ON M 1 In each case, M0 is ON during only one operation cycle when X000 changes from OFF to ON.
PAGE 215
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.12 PLS, PLF 1 The ZRST instruction resets the last stage for the PLS instruction and PLF instruction of the applicable device. In addition, the reset state of T and C is also reset. Introduction 3.
PAGE 216
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.13 7.13 SET, RST SET, RST Outline 1) Setting a bit device (SET instruction (set bit device latch ON)) When the command input turns ON, SET instruction sets to ON an output relay (Y), auxiliary relay (M), state relay (S) and bit specification (D .b) of word device. Even if the command input turns OFF after that, the device which was set to ON by SET instruction remains ON.
PAGE 217
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.13 SET, RST 1 SET instruction drives the coil for an output relay (Y), auxiliary relay (M), state relay (S) and bit specification of data register (D). Introduction Explanation of function and operation 1. When using a bit device 2 SET instructions located in parallel can be used consecutively as many times as necessary.
PAGE 218
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.13 SET, RST Cautions on using RST instruction for a jumped program, subroutine program or interrupt program When RST instruction for a timer or counter is executed in a jumped program, subroutine program or interrupt program, the timer or counter may be kept in the reset status and the timer or counter may be disabled.
PAGE 219
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 NOP Introduction 7.14 7.14 NOP Outline 1. Instruction format 1 step Mnemonic NOP − No Operation 3 Operation Condition Continuous Operation Pulse (Single) Operation Instruction List Basic Instruction NOP 2. Applicable devices Instruction System User Word Devices Digit Specification System User X Y M T C S D .
PAGE 220
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.15 7.15 END END Outline END instruction specifies the end of a program. (Do not write the END instruction in the middle of a program.) 1. Instruction format Basic Instruction END 1 step Mnemonic END − END Operation Condition Continuous Operation Pulse (Single) Operation 2.
PAGE 221
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 Number of Instruction Steps and Specified Devices The table below shows the number of steps of basic instructions. Available devices and device ranges vary depending on the PLC. For details on devices, refer to Chapter 4. For ORB, ANB, MPS, MRD, MPP, MCR, INV, MEP, MEF, NOP and END instructions, refer to pages explaining these instructions.
PAGE 222
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8. Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 FNC 00 to FNC 09 provide instructions mainly related to control flow of sequence programs such as conditional program execution and priority processing. 220 FNC No. Mnemonic 00 CJ 01 CALL 02 SRET 03 IRET 04 Symbol Function Reference CJ Pn Conditional Jump Section 8.1 CALL Pn Call Subroutine Section 8.
PAGE 223
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 FNC 00 – CJ / Conditional Jump Introduction 8.1 8.1 FNC 00 – CJ / Conditional Jump 2 Outline Overview CJ or CJP instruction jumps to a pointer (P); The sequence program steps between CJ or CJP instruction and the pointer are not executed. CJ and CJP instructions reduce the scan time, and allow programs with double coils. 1.
PAGE 224
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.1 FNC 00 – CJ / Conditional Jump Cautions 1. Relationship between the label input position and the list program The figure below shows programming of a label. When creating a circuit program, move the cursor to the left side of the bus line in the ladder diagram, and input a label (P) at the head of the circuit block.
PAGE 225
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.1 FNC 00 – CJ / Conditional Jump 1 Introduction 5. Label unnecessary for the pointer P63 The pointer P63 specifies jump to END step. Do not program P63. If P63 is programmed, PLCs will display the error code 6507 (defective label definition) and stop. FNC 00 CJ 2 Overview Label P 63 P 63 END Do not program P63. 3 6.
PAGE 226
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.1 FNC 00 – CJ / Conditional Jump Program example 1. When a jump is necessary after OFF processing In one operation cycle after X023 changes from OFF to ON, the CJ P7 instruction becomes valid. By using this method, jump can be executed after all outputs between the CJ P7 instruction and the label P7 turn OFF.
PAGE 227
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 CJ instruction and operations of contact and coil In the program example shown below, when X000 turns ON, the program execution jumps from CJ instruction in the first circuit to the label P8. While X000 is OFF, jump is not executed; The program is executed from the 1st step in turn, and then the program execution jumps from CJ instruction in the 11th circuit to the label P9.
PAGE 228
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.1 FNC 00 – CJ / Conditional Jump 2. Circuit example 2 for explaining operations (when only an RST instruction for a timer or counter is jumped) X012 C0 X011 K10 FNC 00 CJ X010 When X011 turns ON while the RST instruction for the counter C0 is operating (X010 is ON), the program execution jumps past the RST instruction due to the CJ (FNC 00) instruction.
PAGE 229
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 Relationship between master control instruction and jump instruction Introduction The figure below shows the contents of operation and the relationship between the master control instruction. Avoid using [2], [4] and [5] because the operation will be complicated.
PAGE 230
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.2 FNC 01 – CALL / Call Subroutine 8.2 FNC 01 – CALL / Call Subroutine Outline This instruction calls and executes a program which should be processed commonly in a sequence program. This instruction reduces the number of program steps, and achieves efficient program design. For creating a subroutine program, FEND (FNC 06) and SRET (FNC 02) instructions are required. 1.
PAGE 231
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.2 FNC 01 – CALL / Call Subroutine 1 Introduction Caution 1. Using a label (P) number two or more times In CALL instructions, the same number can be used two or more times in operands (P). However, do not use a label (P) and number used in another instruction (CJ instruction).
PAGE 232
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.2 FNC 01 – CALL / Call Subroutine 8.2.1 Cautions on subroutines and interrupt routines This section explains cautions on creating programs in subroutines and interrupt routines. The explanation below is given for subroutines, but the situation also applies to interrupt routines. 1.
PAGE 233
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.2 FNC 01 – CALL / Call Subroutine 1 1) Introduction Example for resetting held outputs (countermeasures) Program example X000 FNC 01 CALLP X001 X002 2 K10 RST Y007 Overview C0 P0 Y007 is reset at an arbitrary timing. FNC 06 FEND X000 RST C0 RST C0 Instruction List P0 3 A B M8001 4 The preceding RST C0 instruction is deactivated in the subroutine.
PAGE 234
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.3 8.3 FNC 02 – SRET / Subroutine Return FNC 02 – SRET / Subroutine Return Outline This instruction returns the program execution from a subroutine to the main program. 1. Instruction format FNC 02 SRET Independent Inst. Mnemonic 1 step SRET Operation Condition Continuous Operation This instruction is the independent type, and does not require drive contact. 2.
PAGE 235
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 FNC 03 – IRET / Interrupt Return Introduction 8.4 8.4 FNC 03 – IRET / Interrupt Return 2 Outline Overview This instruction returns the program execution from an interrupt routine to the main program. 1. Instruction format FNC 03 IRET Independent Inst.
PAGE 236
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 8.4 FNC 03 – IRET / Interrupt Return Program example FNC 04 EI M8000 C255 Main program Interrupt pointer I001 FNC 06 FEND The rising edge of X000 is detected.
PAGE 237
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 FNC 04 – EI / Enable Interrupt Introduction 8.5 8.5 FNC 04 – EI / Enable Interrupt 2 Outline Overview Interrupts are usually disabled in PLCs. This instruction enables interrupts in PLCs. Use this instruction for using the input interrupt, timer interrupt and counter interrupt functions. 1. Instruction format Independent Inst.
PAGE 238
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.6 8.6 FNC 05 – DI / Disable Interrupt FNC 05 – DI / Disable Interrupt Outline This instruction disables interrupts after interrupts were enabled by EI (FNC 04) instruction. 1. Instruction format FNC 05 DI Independent Inst. Mnemonic 1 step DI Operation Condition Continuous Operation This instruction is the independent type, and does not require drive contact. 2.
PAGE 239
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 FNC 06 – FEND / Main Routine Program End Introduction 8.7 8.7 FNC 06 – FEND / Main Routine Program End 2 Outline Overview This instruction indicates the end of the main program. 1. Instruction format FNC 06 FEND Independent Inst.
PAGE 240
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.7 FNC 06 – FEND / Main Routine Program End 2. In the case of CALL instruction Main routine program X011 FNC 01 CALL P 21 Main routine program When X011 is OFF When X011 is ON 0 FNC 06 FEND P21 Subroutine program I100 Interrupt routine program END Cautions 1.
PAGE 241
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 FNC 07 – WDT / Watchdog Timer Refresh Introduction 8.8 8.8 FNC 07 – WDT / Watchdog Timer Refresh Outline 2 This instruction refreshes the watchdog timer in a sequence program. FNC 07 WDT Independent Inst. Mnemonic P 1 step WDT WDTP Overview 1.
PAGE 242
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.8 FNC 07 – WDT / Watchdog Timer Refresh 2. The watchdog timer time can be changed. → For details on changing watchdog timer time, refer to Subsection 37.2.2. By overwriting the contents of D8000 (watchdog timer time), the watchdog timer detection time (initial value: 200 ms) can be changed.
PAGE 243
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 FNC 08 – FOR / Start a FOR/NEXT Loop Introduction 8.9 8.9 FNC 08 – FOR / Start a FOR/NEXT Loop Outline 2 FOR instruction specifies the number of repetition of the loop between FOR and NEXT (FNC 09) instructions. Overview 1.
PAGE 244
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.10 8.10 FNC 09 – NEXT / End a FOR/NEXT Loop FNC 09 – NEXT / End a FOR/NEXT Loop Outline NEXT instruction specifies the end position of the loop. 1. Instruction format FNC 09 NEXT Independent Inst. Mnemonic Operation Condition This instruction is the independent type, and does not require drive contact. Continuous Operation 1 step NEXT 2.
PAGE 245
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.10 FNC 09 – NEXT / End a FOR/NEXT Loop 1 1. Watchdog timer error When FOR-NEXT loop is repeated many times, the operation cycle (D8010) is too long, and a watchdog timer error may occur. In such a case, change the watchdog timer time or reset the watchdog timer. → For details on changing the watchdog timer time, refer to Subsection 37.2.2.
PAGE 246
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9. Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 FNC 10 to FNC 19 provide fundamental data processing instructions such as data transfer and data comparison which are regarded as most important in applied instructions. 244 FNC No.
PAGE 247
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 FNC 10 – CMP / Compare Introduction 9.1 9.1 FNC 10 – CMP / Compare Outline 1. Instruction format FNC 10 CMP D 16-bit Instruction P 7 steps Mnemonic Operation Condition Operation Condition DCMP 13 steps DCMPP Continuous Operation Pulse (Single) Operation 2.
PAGE 248
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.1 FNC 10 – CMP / Compare 2. 32-bit operation (DCMP and DCMPP) The comparison value [ S1 +1, ] and the comparison source [ S2 S1 According to the result (smaller, equal or larger), either • The source data [ S1 +1, S1 ] [ S2 +1, S2 , D +1 or D +1, S2 ] are compared with each other. +2 turns ON. D ] are handled as binary values.
PAGE 249
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 FNC 11 – ZCP / Zone Compare Introduction 9.2 9.2 FNC 11 – ZCP / Zone Compare Outline 2 Overview This instruction compares two values (zone) with the comparison source, and outputs the result (smaller, equal or larger) to bit devices (3 points). → For the contact comparison instruction, refer to Chapter 28. → For floating point comparison, refer to Section 18.2. 1.
PAGE 250
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.2 FNC 11 – ZCP / Zone Compare 2. 32-bit operation (DZCP and DZCPP) The lower comparison value [ S1 comparison source [ S or D +1, +1, S1 ] and upper comparison value [ S2 +1, S2 ] are compared with the ]. According to the result (smaller, within zone or larger), either S D , D +1 +2 turns ON. • Comparison is executed algebraically.
PAGE 251
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 FNC 12 – MOV / Move Introduction 9.3 9.3 FNC 12 – MOV / Move Outline 2 This instruction transfers (copies) the contents of a device to another device. Overview 1.
PAGE 252
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.3 FNC 12 – MOV / Move When a word device is specified The word device transfers 1 point. Command input FNC 12 MOV S Before execution D10 D50 D :D10 K50 :D50 Command contact ON K0 50 S Transfer After execution K50 0 D K50 50 2.
PAGE 253
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.3 FNC 12 – MOV / Move 1 Introduction Program examples 1. When reading the current value of a timer and counter X001 FNC 12 MOV T 0 D 20 (Current value of T0) → (D20) The operation is the same as a counter. 2 Overview 2.
PAGE 254
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.4 9.4 FNC 13 – SMOV / Shift Move FNC 13 – SMOV / Shift Move Outline This instruction distributes and composes data in units of digit (4 bits). 1. Instruction format FNC 13 SMOV 16-bit Instruction P 11 steps Mnemonic Operation Condition SMOV SMOVP 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition − − Continuous Operation Pulse (Single) Operation 2.
PAGE 255
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.4 FNC 13 – SMOV / Shift Move 1 1. 16-bit operation (SMOV and SMOVP) The contents of the transfer source and transfer destination S are converted into 4-digit BCD (0000 to D 9999) respectively.
PAGE 256
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.5 9.5 FNC 14 – CML / Complement FNC 14 – CML / Complement Outline This instruction inverts data in units of bit, and then transfers (copies) the inverted data. 1.
PAGE 257
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.5 FNC 14 – CML / Complement 1 Each bit of devices specified as [ S [ D +1, +1, S ] is inverted (from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0), and then transferred to ]. D • When a constant (K) is specified as [ S +1, S ], it is automatically converted into binary. 2 • This operation is useful when a logically inverted output is required as an output from a PLC.
PAGE 258
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.6 9.6 FNC 15 – BMOV / Block Move FNC 15 – BMOV / Block Move Outline This instruction transfers (copies) a specified number of data all at once. 1. Instruction format FNC 15 BMOV 16-bit Instruction P 7 steps Mnemonic Operation Condition BMOV BMOVP 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition − − Continuous Operation Pulse (Single) Operation 2.
PAGE 259
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.6 FNC 15 – BMOV / Block Move 1 By controlling the direction inverse flag M8024*1 for BMOV (FNC 15) instruction, data can be transferred in two directions in one program.
PAGE 260
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.6.1 9.6 FNC 15 – BMOV / Block Move Function of transfer between file registers and data registers BMOV (FNC 15) instruction has a special function for file registers (D1000 and later). → For details on file registers, refer to Section 4.9. 1.
PAGE 261
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.6 FNC 15 – BMOV / Block Move 1 File register operation File registers are secured inside the built-in memory or memory cassette. Different from general data registers, file registers can be read and written only by peripheral equipment or BMOV (FNC 15) instruction.
PAGE 262
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.7 9.7 FNC 16 – FMOV / Fill Move FNC 16 – FMOV / Fill Move Outline This instruction transfers same data to specified number of devices. 1.
PAGE 263
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.7 FNC 16 – FMOV / Fill Move 1 The contents of [ S +1, S ] are transferred to "n" 32-bit devices starting from [ D +1, D Introduction 2. 32-bit operation (DFMOV and DFMOVP) ]. • The contents will be the same among all of "n" 32-bit devices. • If the number of points specified by "n" exceeds the device number range, data is transferred within the possible range.
PAGE 264
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.8 9.8 FNC 17 – XCH / Exchange FNC 17 – XCH / Exchange Outline This instruction exchanges data between two devices. 1.
PAGE 265
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.8 FNC 17 – XCH / Exchange 1 When the instruction is executed while M8160 is ON, high-order 8 bits (byte) and low-order 8 bits (byte) of a word device are exchanged with each other. Because this instruction works in the same way as SWAP (FNC147) instruction, use SWAP instruction when programming a new exchange.
PAGE 266
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.9 9.9 FNC 18 – BCD / Conversion to Binary Coded Decimal FNC 18 – BCD / Conversion to Binary Coded Decimal Outline This instruction converts binary (BIN) data into binary-coded decimal (BCD) data. Binary data is used in operations in PLCs. Use this instruction to display numeric values on the seven-segment display unit equipped with BCD decoder. 1.
PAGE 267
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.9 FNC 18 – BCD / Conversion to Binary Coded Decimal 1 This instruction converts the binary (BIN) data of [ S transfers the converted BCD data to [ D • The data of [ S +1, S +1, D S +1, S ] and [ D 2 ].
PAGE 268
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.9 FNC 18 – BCD / Conversion to Binary Coded Decimal Program examples 1. When the seven-segment display unit has 1 digit X000 FNC 18 BCD D0 K1Y000 PLC 2. When the seven-segment display unit has 2 to 4 digits X000 FNC 18 BCD D0 PLC K2Y000 Output destination In the case of 2 digits: K2 In the case of 3 digits: K3 In the case of 4 digits: K4 K4 K3 K2 K1 3.
PAGE 269
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 FNC 19 – BIN / Conversion to Binary Introduction 9.10 9.10 FNC 19 – BIN / Conversion to Binary Outline 1. Instruction format FNC 19 BIN D 16-bit Instruction P Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition DBIN 9 steps DBINP Continuous Operation Pulse (Single) Operation Continuous Operation Pulse (Single) Operation 2.
PAGE 270
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.10 FNC 19 – BIN / Conversion to Binary 2. 32-bit operation (DBIN and DBINP) This instruction converts the binary-coded decimal (BCD) data of [ S transfers the converted binary data to [ D • The data of [ S +1, S +1, FNC 19 DBIN ] into binary (BIN) data, and S ] can be converted if it is ranging from 0 to 99,999,999 (BCD).
PAGE 271
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.10 FNC 19 – BIN / Conversion to Binary 1 Introduction Program examples 1. When the digital switch has 1 digit X000 FNC 19 BIN K1X000 D0 2 6 Overview MOV instruction can be used instead.
PAGE 272
10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10. Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 FNC 20 to FNC 29 provide instructions for arithmetic operations and logical operations of numeric data. FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function 20 ADD ADD S1 S2 D Addition Section 10.1 21 SUB SUB S1 S2 D Subtraction Section 10.
PAGE 273
10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 FNC 20 – ADD / Addition Introduction 10.1 10.1 FNC 20 – ADD / Addition Outline 1. Instruction format D FNC 20 ADD Mnemonic 16-bit Instruction P 7 steps Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic ADD ADDP Operation Condition Continuous Operation Pulse (Single) Operation 13 steps DADD DADDP 2.
PAGE 274
10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.1 FNC 20 – ADD / Addition Related devices 1. Relationship between the flag operation and the sign (positive or negative) of a numeric value → For the flag operations, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
PAGE 275
10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 FNC 21 – SUB / Subtraction Introduction 10.2 10.2 FNC 21 – SUB / Subtraction Outline 1.
PAGE 276
10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.2 FNC 21 – SUB / Subtraction Related devices 1. Relationship between the flag operation and the sign (positive or negative) of a numeric value → For the flag operations, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
PAGE 277
10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 FNC 22 – MUL / Multiplication Introduction 10.3 10.3 FNC 22 – MUL / Multiplication Outline 1. Instruction format D FNC 22 MUL 16-bit Instruction P 7 steps Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic MUL MULP Operation Condition Continuous Operation Pulse (Single) Operation 13 steps DMUL DMULP 2.
PAGE 278
10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.3 FNC 22 – MUL / Multiplication • When a digit (K1 to K8) is specified for [ D +1, D ] A digit can be specified ranging from K1 to K8. For example, when K2 is specified, only the low-order 8 bits can be obtained out of the product (32 bits).
PAGE 279
10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.3 FNC 22 – MUL / Multiplication 1 1. Devices specified in Introduction Cautions D • In a 32-bit operation (by DMUL or DMULP), Z cannot be specified in D . 2. When monitoring the operation result in a programming tool 2 Overview Even if word devices are used, the operation result (64 bits) cannot be monitored at one time.
PAGE 280
10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.4 10.4 FNC 23 – DIV / Division FNC 23 – DIV / Division Outline This instruction executes division by two values to obtain the result (A ÷ B = C ... ). → For the floating point division instruction EDIV (FNC123), refer to Section 18.11. 1.
PAGE 281
10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.4 FNC 23 – DIV / Division 1 [ S1 +1, S1 ] indicates the dividend, [ S2 [ D +1, D ]), and the remainder is transferred to [ D Command input FNC 23 DDIV S1 S2 ] indicates the divisor, the quotient is transferred to +3, D +2]. 2 D S2 Divisor BIN ] ÷ [ S2 +1, S2 32 bits Quotient BIN ] → [ D +1, D 32 bits Remainder BIN ] ...
PAGE 282
10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.4 FNC 23 – DIV / Division Program examples 1. 16-bit operation X000 FNC 23 DIV S1 S2 D D 0 D 2 D 4 S1 S2 D D 0 D 2 D 4 Dividend Divisor Quotient Remainder (D 0) ÷ (D 2) → (D 4) ... (D 5) 100 33 3 1 2. 32-bit operation X001 FNC 23 DDIV Dividend Divisor Quotient Remainder (D 1,D 0) ÷ (D 3,D 2) → (D 5,D 4) ...
PAGE 283
10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 FNC 24 – INC / Increment Introduction 10.5 10.5 FNC 24 – INC / Increment Outline 2 This instruction increments the data of a specified device by "1". Overview 1.
PAGE 284
10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.5 FNC 24 – INC / Increment Program example X010 FNC 12 MOVP K 0 Z FNC 18 BCDP C 0Z K4Y000 FNC 24 INCP Z FNC 10 CMPP K 10 0 → (Z) Z is cleared by the reset input X010. (C 0Z) → (K4Y000) BIN BCD The current values of counters C0 to C9 are converted into BCD format, and output to K4Y000.
PAGE 285
10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1 FNC 25 – DEC / Decrement Introduction 10.6 10.6 FNC 25 – DEC / Decrement Outline 2 This instruction decrements the data of a specified device by "1". Overview 1.
PAGE 286
10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.7 10.7 FNC 26 – WAND / Logical Word AND FNC 26 – WAND / Logical Word AND Outline This instruction executes the logical product (AND) operation of two numeric values. 1.
PAGE 287
10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.7 FNC 26 – WAND / Logical Word AND 1 The logical product (AND) operation is executed to the contents of [ S1 bit, and the result is transferred to [ D Command input FNC 26 DAND S1 +1, S2 D D +1, S1 ] and [ S2 +1, S2 ] in units of ]. S1 ∧ +1, S1 +1, S2 • While the command input is ON, the data of the transfer source [ S1 change.
PAGE 288
10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.8 10.8 FNC 27 – WOR / Logical Word OR FNC 27 – WOR / Logical Word OR Outline This instruction executes the logical sum (OR) operation of two numeric values. 1.
PAGE 289
10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.8 FNC 27 – WOR / Logical Word OR 1 The logical sum (OR) operation is executed to the contents of [ S1 and the result is transferred to [ D Command input FNC 27 DOR S1 +1, D D S2 +1, S1 ] and [ S2 +1, S2 ] in units of bit, ]. S1 ∨ S2 +1, S2 +1, S1 • While the command input is ON, the data of the transfer source [ S1 change.
PAGE 290
10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.9 10.9 FNC 28 – WXOR / Logical Exclusive OR FNC 28 – WXOR / Logical Exclusive OR Outline This instruction executes the exclusive logical sum (XOR) operation of two numeric values. 1.
PAGE 291
10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.9 FNC 28 – WXOR / Logical Exclusive OR 1 The exclusive logical sum (XOR) operation is executed to the contents of [ S1 units of bit, and the result is transferred to [ D Command input FNC 28 DXOR S1 +1, D S2 D S1 +1, S1 ] and [ S2 +1, S2 ] in ].
PAGE 292
10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.10 FNC 29 – NEG / Negation 10.10 FNC 29 – NEG / Negation Outline This instruction obtains the complement of a numeric value (by inverting each bit and adding "1"). This instruction can be used to negate the sign of a numeric value. → For the Floating point negation ENEG (FNC128), refer to Section 18.16. 1.
PAGE 293
10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.10 FNC 29 – NEG / Negation 1 Introduction Program examples The program examples below are provided to obtain the absolute value of a negative binary value. 1.
PAGE 294
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11. Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 FNC 30 to FNC 39 provide instructions for rotating and shifting bit data and word data in specified directions. 292 FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function 30 ROR ROR D n Rotation Right Section 11.1 31 ROL ROL D n Rotation Left Section 11.2 32 RCR RCR D n Rotation Right with Carry Section 11.
PAGE 295
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC 30 – ROR / Rotation Right FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 11.1 11.1 FNC 30 – ROR / Rotation Right Outline This instruction shifts and rotates the bit information rightward by the specified number of bits without the carry flag.
PAGE 296
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.1 FNC 30 – ROR / Rotation Right 2. 32-bit operation (DROR and DRORP) "n" bits out of 32 bits of [ D Command input FNC 30 DRORP D +1, D ] are rotated rightward. n • The final bit is stored in the carry flag (M8022). • In a device with digit specification, K8 (32-bit instruction) is valid.
PAGE 297
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC 31 – ROL / Rotation Left FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 11.2 11.2 FNC 31 – ROL / Rotation Left Outline This instruction shifts and rotates the bit information leftward by the specified number of bits without the carry flag.
PAGE 298
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.2 FNC 31 – ROL / Rotation Left 2. 32-bit operation (DROL and DROLP) "n" bits out of 32 bits of [ D Command input FNC 31 +1, D DROLP D ] are rotated leftward. n • The final bit is stored in the carry flag (M8022). • In a device with digit specification, K8 (32-bit instruction) is valid.
PAGE 299
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC 32 – RCR / Rotation Right with Carry FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 11.3 11.3 FNC 32 – RCR / Rotation Right with Carry Outline This instruction shifts and rotates the bit information rightward by the specified number of bits together with the carry flag.
PAGE 300
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.3 FNC 32 – RCR / Rotation Right with Carry 2. 32-bit operation (DRCR and DRCRP) "n" bits out of 32 bits of [ D Command input FNC 32 DRCRP +1, D D ] and 1 bit (carry flag M8022) are rotated rightward.
PAGE 301
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC 33 – RCL / Rotation Left with Carry FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 11.4 11.4 FNC 33 – RCL / Rotation Left with Carry Outline This instruction shifts and rotates the bit information leftward by the specified number of bits together with the carry flag.
PAGE 302
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.4 FNC 33 – RCL / Rotation Left with Carry 2. 32-bit operation (DRCL and DRCLP) "n" bits out of 32 bits of [ D Command input FNC 33 +1, D DRCLP D ] and 1 bit (carry flag M8022) are rotated leftward. n "n" bits (in the case of K4) High order Before execution b31 to b28 (b32−n) are moved.
PAGE 303
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC 34 – SFTR / Bit Shift Right FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 11.5 11.5 FNC 34 – SFTR / Bit Shift Right Outline This instruction shifts bit devices of the specified bit length rightward by the specified number of bits. After shift, the bit device S is transferred by "n2" bits from the most significant bit.
PAGE 304
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.5 FNC 34 – SFTR / Bit Shift Right Explanation of function and operation 1. 16-bit operation (SFTR and SFTRP) For "n1" bits (shift register length) starting from D , "n2" bits are shifted rightward ([1] and [2] shown below). After shift, "n2" bits from S are transferred to "n2" bits from D +n1-n2 ([3] shown below).
PAGE 305
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC 35 – SFTL / Bit Shift Left FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 11.6 11.6 FNC 35 – SFTL / Bit Shift Left Outline This instruction shifts bit devices of the specified bit length leftward by the specified number of bits. After shift, the bit device S is transferred by "n2" bits from the least significant bit.
PAGE 306
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.6 FNC 35 – SFTL / Bit Shift Left Caution Note that "n2" bits are shifted every time the command input turns from OFF to ON in the SFTLP instruction, but that "n2" bits are shifted in each operation cycle in the SFTL instruction. Error If the transfer source S is equivalent to the shifted device (error code: K6710).
PAGE 307
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 Replacement of SFT instruction in F1 and F2 Series SFT instruction in F1/F2 PLCs corresponds to SFTL (FNC 35) instruction in FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs as shown below: 1.
PAGE 308
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.7 11.7 FNC 36 – WSFR / Word Shift Right FNC 36 – WSFR / Word Shift Right Outline This instruction shifts word devices with "n1" data length rightward by "n2" words. 1.
PAGE 309
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.7 FNC 36 – WSFR / Word Shift Right 11 Note that "n2" words are shifted when the drive input turns ON in the WSFRP instruction, but that "n2" words are shifted in each operation cycle in the WSFR instruction. Error If the transfer source is equivalent to the shifted device S D , an operation error occurs (error code: K6710). 1.
PAGE 310
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.8 11.8 FNC 37 – WSFL / Word Shift Left FNC 37 – WSFL / Word Shift Left Outline This instruction shifts the word data information leftward by the specified number of words. 1.
PAGE 311
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.
PAGE 312
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.9 11.9 FNC 38 – SFWR / Shift Write [FIFO/FILO Control] FNC 38 – SFWR / Shift Write [FIFO/FILO Control] Outline This instruction writes data for first-in first-out (FIFO) and last-in first-out (LIFO) control. 1.
PAGE 313
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.9 FNC 38 – SFWR / Shift Write [FIFO/FILO Control] 11 1. 16-bit operation (SFWR and SFWRP) Command input FNC 38 SFWRP S S D n 13 n D+n FNC50-FNC59 High-Speed Processing Before execution ... D+10 D+9 D+8 D+7 D+6 D+5 D+4 D+3 D+2 D+1 D Pointer Executed at the 1st time ( D = 0) D S (K0) ...
PAGE 314
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.9 FNC 38 – SFWR / Shift Write [FIFO/FILO Control] Program example 1. Example of first-in first-out control → For a program example of FILO, refer to Section 27.3. In the example below, the shift write (SFWR) and shift read (SFRD) instructions are used.
PAGE 315
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.10 FNC 39 – SFRD / Shift Read [FIFO Control] 11 FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 11.10 FNC 39 – SFRD / Shift Read [FIFO Control] Outline This instruction reads data for first-in first-out control.
PAGE 316
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition D 11.10 FNC 39 – SFRD / Shift Read [FIFO Control] n Before execution S+n ... S+10 S+9 S+8 S+7 S+6 S+5 S+4 S+3 S+2 S+1 S S =n S −1 → S S −1 → S Pointer Executed at the 1st time S+1 D S+n S+n After execution ... S+10 S+9 S+8 S+7 S+6 S+5 S+4 S+3 S+2 Word data is shifted. Executed at the 2nd time S Pointer S+2 D S+n S+n S+n ...
PAGE 317
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 12. Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Mnemonic Symbol Function 40 ZRST 41 DECO 42 ENCO 43 SUM 44 BON 45 MEAN 46 ANS 47 ANR 48 SQR SQR 49 FLT FLT Reference Zone Reset Section 12.1 DECO S D n Decode Section 12.2 ENCO S D n Encode Section 12.3 Sum of Active Bits Section 12.
PAGE 318
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.1 12.1 FNC 40 – ZRST / Zone Reset FNC 40 – ZRST / Zone Reset Outline This instruction resets devices located in a zone between two specified devices at one time. Use this instruction for restarting operation from the beginning after pause or after resetting control data. 1.
PAGE 319
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.1 FNC 40 – ZRST / Zone Reset 11 and D21 are word devices "K0" is written to the entire range from D1 Command input D2 D1 … D2 to D21 at one time. Devices D1 through D2 are reset at one time.
PAGE 320
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.1 FNC 40 – ZRST / Zone Reset 3. Caution for simultaneous instances of the ZRST instruction and the PLS instruction The ZRST instruction resets the last stage for the PLS instruction and PLF instruction of the applicable device. In addition, the reset state of T and C is also reset.
PAGE 321
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.1 FNC 40 – ZRST / Zone Reset 11 The ZRST instruction resets also the last stage and reset state of T and C coils. Accordingly, if the drive contact of X000 is ON in the following program, the counter executes counting after the ZRST instruction is executed.
PAGE 322
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.2 12.2 FNC 41 – DECO / Decode FNC 41 – DECO / Decode Outline This instruction converts numeric data into ON bit. A bit number which is set to ON by this instruction indicates a numeric value. 1.
PAGE 323
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.2 FNC 41 – DECO / Decode 11 When DD1 is a word device (1 ≤ n ≤ 4) The numeric value (expressed in 2n on the low-order side) of DS1 -When all bits of DS1 are "0", b0 of the word device DD1 -In the case of "n ≤ 3", all of high-order bits of DD1 is decoded to DD1 FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 2) . turns ON. become "0" (turn OFF).
PAGE 324
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.2 FNC 41 – DECO / Decode Program example 1. When setting bit devices to ON according to the value of a data register The value of D0 (whose current value is "14" in this example) is decoded to M0 to M15.
PAGE 325
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC 42 – ENCO / Encode FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 12.3 12.3 FNC 42 – ENCO / Encode Outline This instruction obtains positions in which bits are ON in data.
PAGE 326
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2) When DS1 12.3 FNC 42 – ENCO / Encode is a word device (1 ≤ n ≤ 4) ON bit positions among "2n" bits (1 ≤ n ≤ 4) from a device specified in DS1 -The encoding result of DD1 are encoded to DD1 . is "0" (OFF) from the most significant bit to the low-order bit "n".
PAGE 327
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.4 FNC 43 – SUM / Sum of Active Bits FNC 43 – SUM / Sum of Active Bits FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 12.4 11 Outline This instruction counts the number of "1" (ON) bits in the data of a specified device.
PAGE 328
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.4 FNC 43 – SUM / Sum of Active Bits 2. 32-bit operation (DSUM and DSUMP) The number of bits in the ON status in [ DS1 +1, DS1 ] is counted, and stored to DD1 . • The number of bits in the ON status are stored in DD1 , and K0 is stored in DD1 +1. • When all bits are OFF in [ DS1 Command input FNC 43 DSUM +1, DS1 S ], the zero flag M8020 turns ON.
PAGE 329
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.4 FNC 43 – SUM / Sum of Active Bits 11 FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift Caution While the command input is OFF, the instruction is not executed. The output of the number of bits in the ON status is latched in the previous status. Program example 12 When X000 is ON, the number of bits in the ON status in D0 is counted, and stored to D2.
PAGE 330
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.5 12.5 FNC 44 – BON / Check Specified Bit Status FNC 44 – BON / Check Specified Bit Status Outline This instruction checks whether a specified bit position in a specified device is ON or OFF. 1.
PAGE 331
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.5 FNC 44 – BON / Check Specified Bit Status 11 The status (ON or OFF) of the bit "n" in [ DS1 [When the bit "n" is ON, DD1 +1, DS1 ] is output to DD1 is set to ON. When the bit "n" is OFF, DD1 • When a constant (K) is specified as the transfer source [ DS1 format. S DBON D n [ S +1, S is set to OFF.
PAGE 332
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.6 12.6 FNC 45 – MEAN / Mean FNC 45 – MEAN / Mean Outline This instruction obtains the mean value of data. 1.
PAGE 333
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.6 FNC 45 – MEAN / Mean 11 FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift Caution • When a device number is exceeded, "n" is handled as a smaller value in the possible range. • Note that the 32-bit value [n+1, n] is valid when D or R is specified as "n" in a 32-bit instruction. In the case of "DMEAN D0 D100 R0", "n" is [R1, R0].
PAGE 334
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.7 12.7 FNC 46 – ANS / Timed Annunciator Set FNC 46 – ANS / Timed Annunciator Set Outline This instruction sets a state relay as an annunciator (S900 to S999). 1. Instruction format FNC 46 ANS Mnemonic 16-bit Instruction 7 steps Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Continuous Operation ANS Operation Condition − 2.
PAGE 335
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.7 FNC 46 – ANS / Timed Annunciator Set 11 1. Displaying a fault number using an annunciator M8000 M8049 0 When M8049 turns ON, monitoring becomes valid.
PAGE 336
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.8 FNC 47 – ANR / Annunciator Reset 12.8 FNC 47 – ANR / Annunciator Reset Outline This instruction resets an annunciator (S900 to S999) in the ON status with the smallest number. 1.
PAGE 337
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC 48 – SQR / Square Root FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 12.9 12.9 FNC 48 – SQR / Square Root Outline 1. Instruction format FNC 48 SQR D 16-bit Instruction P Mnemonic Operation Condition SQR 5 steps 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic SQRP Operation Condition Continuous Operation Pulse (Single) Operation 9 steps DSQR DSQRP 2.
PAGE 338
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.10 FNC 49 – FLT / Conversion to Floating Point 12.10 FNC 49 – FLT / Conversion to Floating Point Outline This instruction converts a binary integer into a binary floating point (real number). 1.
PAGE 339
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.10 FNC 49 – FLT / Conversion to Floating Point 11 FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift Program example 1.
PAGE 340
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13. High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 FNC 50 to FNC 59 provide interrupt processing type high-speed instructions that execute sequence control using the latest I/O information and utilize the high-speed processing performance of the PLC. 338 FNC No.
PAGE 341
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC 50 – REF / Refresh FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 13.1 13.1 FNC 50 – REF / Refresh Outline This instruction immediately outputs the latest input (X) information or the current output (Y) operation result in the middle of a sequence program. FNC40-FNC49 Data Operation 1.
PAGE 342
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.1 FNC 50 – REF / Refresh Explanation of function and operation 1. 16-bit operation (REF and REFP) 1) When refreshing outputs (Y) "n" points are refreshed from the output specified in Command input FNC 50 REF D D . ("n" must be a multiple of 8.
PAGE 343
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.1 FNC 50 – REF / Refresh 11 FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift Does not turn ON.
PAGE 344
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.1.1 13.1 FNC 50 – REF / Refresh What should be understood before using the REF instruction 1. Changing the input filter The input filter value is determined by the contents of D8020 (initial value: 10 ms). Use the MOV instruction, etc. to adjust the value in D8020, which represents the input filter value.
PAGE 345
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC 51 – REFF / Refresh and Filter Adjust FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 13.2 13.2 FNC 51 – REFF / Refresh and Filter Adjust Outline 1.
PAGE 346
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.2 FNC 51 – REFF / Refresh and Filter Adjust Cautions 1. Setting the filter time "n" Set "n" within the range from K0 (H0) to K60 (H3C) [0 to 60 ms]. 2. Function of the input filter A digital filter is built into the inputs X000 to X017. The filter time can be changed in 1 ms units within the range from 0 to 60 ms using applied instructions.
PAGE 347
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 What should be understood before using REFF instruction Generally, a C-R filter of approximately 10 ms is provided for inputs in PLCs as countermeasures against chattering and noise at the input contacts. A digital filter is provided for the inputs X000 to X017 in FX3U/FX3UC PLC.
PAGE 348
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.3 13.3 FNC 52 – MTR / Input Matrix FNC 52 – MTR / Input Matrix Outline This instruction reads matrix input as 8-point input × "n"-point output (transistor) in the time division method. 1. Instruction format FNC 52 MTR Mnemonic 16-bit Instruction 9 steps Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Continuous Operation MTR Operation Condition − 2.
PAGE 349
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.3 FNC 52 – MTR / Input Matrix 11 D2 +17 D2 +16 D2 +15 D2 +14 D2 +13 D2 +12 D2 +11 D2 +10 Diode 0.1A(50V) 2nd column Command contact D2 +7 D2 +6 D2 +5 D2 +4 D2 +3 D2 +2 D2 +1 [1] [3] FNC40-FNC49 Data Operation D2 12 1st column input is received.
PAGE 350
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.3 FNC 52 – MTR / Input Matrix Program example n=Three outputs (Y020, Y021 and Y022) are set to ON in turn repeatedly. Every time an output is set to ON, eight inputs in the 1st, 2nd and 3rd columns are received in turn repeatedly, and stored to M30 to M37, M40 to M47 and M50 to M57 respectively.
PAGE 351
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 Operation and cautions for the MTR instruction FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 13.3.1 13.3 FNC 52 – MTR / Input Matrix 1. Command input 1) Setting the command input to normally Open For the MTR instruction, set the command input to normally Open. FNC 52 MTR X020 Y040 M0 12 FNC40-FNC49 Data Operation M{{ (normally Open) K8 2.
PAGE 352
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.4 13.4 FNC 53 – HSCS / High-Speed Counter Set FNC 53 – HSCS / High-Speed Counter Set Outline This instruction compares a value counted by a high-speed counter with a specified value, and immediately sets an external output (Y) if the two values are equivalent each other. → For the counter interrupt using HSCS instruction, refer to Section 36.6. 1.
PAGE 353
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.4 FNC 53 – HSCS / High-Speed Counter Set 11 M8000 C255 K2,147,483,647 RUN monitor Comparison value K100 C255 12 Set to ON. Y010 FNC40-FNC49 Data Operation FNC 53 DHSCS Comparison Output source destination K100 = C255 → Y010 Related instructions 13 The following instructions can be combined with high-speed counters: FNC No.
PAGE 354
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2) 13.4 FNC 53 – HSCS / High-Speed Counter Set FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs When the HSCS instruction is used in FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs, the total frequency of each counter is affected. Refer to the counting operation described below, and select according to the contents of control whether to use the HSCS instruction or a general-purpose comparison instruction.
PAGE 355
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 Common cautions on using instructions for high-speed counter DHSCS (FNC 53), DHSCR (FNC 54), DHSZ (FNC 55) and DHSCT (FNC280) instructions are provided for high-speed counters. This section explains common cautions for these instructions.
PAGE 356
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.4 FNC 53 – HSCS / High-Speed Counter Set 4. Caution on the counting operation when the current value is changed An instruction for the high-speed counter gives the comparison result when a pulse is input to the input (X) of the highspeed counter.
PAGE 357
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.
PAGE 358
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.5 13.5 FNC 54 – HSCR / High-Speed Counter Reset FNC 54 – HSCR / High-Speed Counter Reset Outline This instruction compares the value counted by a high-speed counter with a specified value at each count, and immediately resets an external output (Y) when both values become equivalent to each other. 1.
PAGE 359
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.5 FNC 54 – HSCR / High-Speed Counter Reset 11 FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift Related instructions The following instructions can be combined with high-speed counters: FNC No.
PAGE 360
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.5 FNC 54 – HSCR / High-Speed Counter Reset 2. Only 32-bit operation instructions are available. Because instructions for high-speed counters are dedicated to 32 bits, make sure to input "DHSCR (FNC 54)". 3. Priority order in operation among HSCS (FNC 53), HSCR (FNC 54), and HSZ (FNC 55) instructions for the same high-speed counter → For details, refer to "6.
PAGE 361
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC 55 – HSZ / High-Speed Counter Zone Compare FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 13.6 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High-Speed Counter Zone Compare Outline 1. Instruction format FNC 55 HSZ D 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic 17 steps 13 Continuous Operation DHSZ FNC50-FNC59 High-Speed Processing − Operation Condition 2.
PAGE 362
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.
PAGE 363
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High-Speed Counter Zone Compare 11 1.
PAGE 364
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High-Speed Counter Zone Compare 2. Device specification range Only high-speed counters (C235 to C255) can be specified as . S 3. Only 32-bit operation instructions are available. Because instructions for high-speed counters are dedicated to 32 bits, make sure to input "DHSZ (FNC 55)". 4.
PAGE 365
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 Program in which comparison result is set to ON when power is turned ON [ZCP (FNC 11) instruction] Explanation of operation The outputs Y010 to Y012 are as shown below: Y010 = ON 1000 13 Y012 = ON FNC50-FNC59 High-Speed Processing 0 Y011 = ON 1200 Current value of C235 Program example 14 RST C235 FNC 40 ZRST Y010 M8000 C235 Y012 FMC60-FNC69 Handy Instr
PAGE 366
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High-Speed Counter Zone Compare Timing chart In the part [1] in the timing chart, Y010 remains OFF if the current value of a high-speed counter (C235 in the example below) is "0" when restoring the power.
PAGE 367
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 Table high-speed comparison mode (M8130) FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 13.6.2 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High-Speed Counter Zone Compare 1.
PAGE 368
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High-Speed Counter Zone Compare 2. Operation M8002 Command input C251 Reset command input 366 FNC 12 DMOV K123 D200 Comparison data FNC 12 MOV H10 D202 Output (Y) number FNC 12 MOV K1 D203 Output is set or reset. K1: Output is set.
PAGE 369
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High-Speed Counter Zone Compare 11 Present value of C251 SET/RST D201,D200 K123 D 202 H10 D 203 K1 0 ↓ D205,D204 K234 D 206 H10 D 207 K0 1 ↓ 567 D209,D208 K345 D 210 H11 D 211 K1 2 ↓ 456 D213,D212 K456 D 214 H11 D 215 K0 3 ↓ D 219 K1 4 ↓ Repeated from "0".
PAGE 370
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.6.3 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High-Speed Counter Zone Compare Frequency control mode (HSZ and PLSY instructions) (M8132) When the special auxiliary relay M8132 for declaring the frequency control mode is specified as instruction, the special function shown below is provided if DPLSY instruction is combined.
PAGE 371
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.
PAGE 372
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High-Speed Counter Zone Compare Output pulse characteristics Output pulse frequency (Hz) 500 300 200 100 0 1) 2) 0 20 600 700 800 → Current value of C251 Write prescribed data in advance to data registers constructing the table as shown in this program example.
PAGE 373
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC 56 – SPD / Speed Detection FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 13.7 13.7 FNC 56 – SPD / Speed Detection Outline This instruction counts the input pulse for a specified period of time as interrupt input. The function of this instruction varies depending on the version. 12 FNC40-FNC49 Data Operation 1.
PAGE 374
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.7 FNC 56 – SPD / Speed Detection Explanation of function and operation 1. 16-bit operation (SPD) The input pulse S1 stored in × 1 ms. The measured value is stored in is counted only for S2 +1, and the remaining time is stored in D By repeating this operation, the measured value rotation speed).
PAGE 375
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.7 FNC 56 – SPD / Speed Detection 11 The input pulse is counted only for [ S2 S1 D ], the present value is stored in [ D (ms). +3, +1, S1 S2 D +1, +4] ] will store the pulse density (which is proportional to D 13 Timing chart Command input The command contact is set to ON.
PAGE 376
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.7 FNC 56 – SPD / Speed Detection Cautions 1.
PAGE 377
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC 57 – PLSY / Pulse Y Output FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 13.8 13.8 FNC 57 – PLSY / Pulse Y Output Outline This instruction generates a pulse signal. → For the frequency control mode, refer to Subsection 13.6.3. FNC40-FNC49 Data Operation 1.
PAGE 378
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.8 FNC 57 – PLSY / Pulse Y Output 2. 32-bit operation (DPLSY) A pulse train at the frequency [ S1 D +1, S1 ] is output by the quantity [ S2 +1, S2 ] from the output (Y) . Command input [ S2 FNC 57 DPLSY S1 S2 D + 1, S2 Pulse quantity ] D [ S1 + 1, S1 Frequency ] • Specify the frequency in [ S1 +1, S1 ].
PAGE 379
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.8 FNC 57 – PLSY / Pulse Y Output 11 FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 2.
PAGE 380
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.8 FNC 57 – PLSY / Pulse Y Output 4. Handling of pulse output terminals in FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC series main units The outputs Y000 and Y001 are the high-speed response type. When using a pulse output instruction or positioning instruction, adjust the load current of the open collector transistor output to about 10 to 100 mA (5 to 24V DC).
PAGE 381
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.
PAGE 382
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.9 13.9 FNC 58 – PWM / Pulse Width Modulation FNC 58 – PWM / Pulse Width Modulation Outline This instruction outputs pulses with a specified period and ON duration. 1. Instruction format FNC 58 PWM Mnemonic 16-bit Instruction 7 steps Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Continuous Operation PWM Operation Condition − 2.
PAGE 383
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.9 FNC 58 – PWM / Pulse Width Modulation 11 FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift Cautions 1. Setting the pulse width and period Make sure that the pulse width S1 and period S2 satisfy the relationship " S1 ≤ S2 ". 2. Pulse output D 12 according to the system configuration.
PAGE 384
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4) 13.9 FNC 58 – PWM / Pulse Width Modulation When special high-speed output adapters are connected, the same output numbers in the main unit are assigned as shown in the table below. Only wire the appropriate output terminals. Outputs in special high-speed output adapters and the main unit operate as shown below.
PAGE 385
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.10 FNC 59 – PLSR / Acceleration/Deceleration Setup 11 FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 13.10 FNC 59 – PLSR / Acceleration/Deceleration Setup Outline This pulse output instruction has the acceleration/deceleration function.
PAGE 386
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.10 FNC 59 – PLSR / Acceleration/Deceleration Setup 2. 32-bit operation (DPLSR) Pulses are output from the output (Y) to the maximum frequency [ S1 Command input FNC 59 DPLSR D +1, S1 S1 S2 Maximum frequency (HZ) by the specified number [ S2 +1, S2 ] for the time [ S3 ](ms).
PAGE 387
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.10 FNC 59 – PLSR / Acceleration/Deceleration Setup 11 1. Instruction execution complete flag → For the instruction execution complete flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2. Device Name Description M8029 2.
PAGE 388
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.10 FNC 59 – PLSR / Acceleration/Deceleration Setup 3. Handling of pulse output terminals in FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC series main units The outputs Y000 and Y001 are the high-speed response type. When using a pulse output instruction or positioning instruction, adjust the load current of the open collector transistor output to about 10 to 100 mA (5 to 24V DC).
PAGE 389
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.10 FNC 59 – PLSR / Acceleration/Deceleration Setup 11 1) Types of pulse output, positioning and other relevant instructions and their target output numbers Classification Pulse output *1.
PAGE 390
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14. Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 FNC 60 to FNC 69 provide handy instructions which achieve complicated control in a minimum sequence program. 388 FNC No. Mnemonic 60 IST 61 SER 62 ABSD 63 Symbol Function Reference Initial State Section 14.1 Search a Data Stack Section 14.2 ABSD S1 S2 D n Absolute drum sequencer Section 14.
PAGE 391
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 14.1 14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State Outline 1. Instruction format FNC 60 IST 16-bit Instruction 7 steps Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Continuous Operation IST Operation Condition 13 − FNC50-FNC59 High-Speed Processing 2.
PAGE 392
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State 1. Control of devices by switch operations (occupied devices) While the command input is ON, the following devices are automatically switched and controlled. While the command input is OFF, the devices are not switched.
PAGE 393
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 IST instruction equivalent circuit The details on special auxiliary relays (M) and initial state relays (S0 to S9) which are automatically controlled by the IST instruction are as shown in the equivalent circuit below. (Refer to the equivalent circuit below for reference.) This equivalent circuit cannot be programmed. 12 1.
PAGE 394
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.1.2 14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State Example of IST instruction introduction (example of workpiece transfer mechanism) 1.
PAGE 395
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.
PAGE 396
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State 4. Special auxiliary relay (M) for the IST instruction Auxiliary relays (M) used in the IST instruction are classified into two types. Some auxiliary relays are automatically controlled by the IST instruction itself according to the situation.
PAGE 397
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State 11 1) 13 Detects that the machine is located at the zero point, and regards it as the condition to start the automatic mode.
PAGE 398
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State c) Zero return operation mode Programming is not required when the zero return operation mode is not provided. It is necessary to set M8043 (zero return complete) to ON before starting the automatic mode.
PAGE 399
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.
PAGE 400
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State 6.
PAGE 401
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.2 FNC 61 – SER / Search a Data Stack FNC 61 – SER / Search a Data Stack FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 14.2 11 Outline 12 This instruction searches for the same data, maximum value and minimum value in a data table. FNC40-FNC49 Data Operation 1.
PAGE 402
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.
PAGE 403
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.
PAGE 404
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.3 14.3 FNC 62 – ABSD / Absolute Drum Sequencer FNC 62 – ABSD / Absolute Drum Sequencer Outline This instruction creates many output patterns corresponding to the current value of a counter. 1.
PAGE 405
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.
PAGE 406
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition D1 , S D1 +1] to [ S D1 +4n-2, S D1 Write the following data to [ S Rising point +4n-1] in advance using a transfer instruction: Falling point Data value (example) Data value (example) Target output + 1, S1 ] 40 [ S1 + 3, S1 + 2] 140 D [ S1 + 5, S1 + 4] 100 [ S1 + 7, S1 + 6] 200 D +1 [ S1 + 9, S1 + 8] 160 [ S1 + 11, S1 + 10] 60 D +2 [ S1 + 13
PAGE 407
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC 63 – INCD / Incremental Drum Sequencer FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 14.4 14.4 FNC 63 – INCD / Incremental Drum Sequencer Outline 12 This instruction creates many output patterns using a pair of counters.
PAGE 408
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.
PAGE 409
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC 64 – TTMR / Teaching Timer FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 14.5 14.5 FNC 64 – TTMR / Teaching Timer Outline 12 1. Instruction format FNC 64 TTMR Mnemonic 16-bit Instruction 5 steps Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Continuous Operation TTMR Operation Condition 13 − FNC50-FNC59 High-Speed Processing 2.
PAGE 410
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.5 FNC 64 – TTMR / Teaching Timer Cautions 1. When the command contact turns OFF The current value [ DD1 +1] of the pressing and holding time is reset, and the teaching time DD1 more. will not change any 2. Number of occupied devices Two devices are occupied from a device specified as the teaching time DD1 .
PAGE 411
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC 65 – STMR / Special Timer FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 14.6 14.6 FNC 65 – STMR / Special Timer Outline 12 This instruction can easily make off-delay timers, one-shot timers and flicker timers.
PAGE 412
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.6 FNC 65 – STMR / Special Timer Command input M0 D M1 D +1 M2 D +2 M3 D +3 10s 10s 10s 10s 10s Flicker In the program shown below which turns OFF STMR instruction at the NC contact of DD1 +1 and DD1 DD1 and DD1 DD1 +3, flicker is output to +2. +3 are occupied.
PAGE 413
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC 66 – ALT / Alternate State FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 14.7 14.7 FNC 66 – ALT / Alternate State Outline 12 This instruction alternates a bit device (from ON to OFF or from OFF to ON) when the input turns ON.
PAGE 414
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.7 FNC 66 – ALT / Alternate State Caution 1. When using (continuous operation type) ALT instruction • When ALT instruction is used, a specified bit device is alternated in every operation cycle. To alternate a specified device by turning the command ON or OFF, use the (pulse operation type) ALTP instruction, or use a pulse operation type command contact such as LDP.
PAGE 415
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC 67 – RAMP / Ramp Variable Value FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 14.8 14.8 FNC 67 – RAMP / Ramp Variable Value Outline 1. Instruction format FNC 67 RAMP Mnemonic 16-bit Instruction 9 steps Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Continuous Operation RAMP Operation Condition − 13 FNC50-FNC59 High-Speed Processing 2.
PAGE 416
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.8 FNC 67 – RAMP / Ramp Variable Value • After transfer is completed, the instruction execution complete flag M8029 turns ON, and the DD1 D1 returned to the S value is value.
PAGE 417
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC 68 – ROTC / Rotary Table Control FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 14.9 14.9 FNC 68 – ROTC / Rotary Table Control Outline This instruction is suitable for efficient control of the rotary table for putting/taking a product into/out of the rotary table.
PAGE 418
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.9 FNC 68 – ROTC / Rotary Table Control Explanation of function and operation 1. 16-bit operation (ROTC) The table rotation is controlled by "m2", DS1 and DD1 so that a product can be efficiently put into or taken out of the rotary table divided into "m1" (=10) sections as shown in the figure below.
PAGE 419
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.9 FNC 68 – ROTC / Rotary Table Control 11 The conditions required to use this instruction are as shown in the example below. 1) Rotation detection signal: X → DD1 - Provide a 2-phase switch (X000 and X001) for detecting the rotation direction (forward or backward) of the table and the switch X002 which turns ON when the product No. 0 reaches the port No. 0.
PAGE 420
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.10 FNC 69 – SORT / SORT Tabulated Data 14.10 FNC 69 – SORT / SORT Tabulated Data Outline This instruction sorts a data table consisting of data (lines) and group data (columns) based on a specified group data (column) sorted by line in ascending order. This instruction stores the group data (columns) in serial devices.
PAGE 421
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.10 FNC 69 – SORT / SORT Tabulated Data 11 columns (m1 = K3, m2 = K4). For the sorting result data table, understand DS1 Column No. Line No. 1 2 3 4 Control number Height Weight Age 1 S S +3 S +6 S +9 2 S +1 S +4 S +7 S +10 3 S +2 S +5 S +8 S +11 12 2. Operation examples When the instruction is executed with "n = K2 (column No.
PAGE 422
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2) 14.10 FNC 69 – SORT / SORT Tabulated Data Sorting result when the instruction is executed with "n = K3 (column No. 3)" Column No. Line No.
PAGE 423
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 15. External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 12 FNC40-FNC49 Data Operation FNC 70 to FNC 79 provide instructions to receive data from and send data to external devices mainly using inputs and outputs in PLC.
PAGE 424
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.1 15.1 FNC 70 – TKY / Ten Key Input FNC 70 – TKY / Ten Key Input Outline This instruction sets data for timers and counters through ten key inputs ranging from "0" to "9". 1.
PAGE 425
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.1 FNC 70 – TKY / Ten Key Input 11 to D2 +10] - For the key sensing output, D2 Command input FNC 70 S TKY to D2 +9 turn ON or OFF according to the pressed keys. +10 turns ON when any key is pressed.
PAGE 426
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.1 FNC 70 – TKY / Ten Key Input 3. Number of occupied device 1) Ten bit devices are occupied from S for connecting the ten keys. Because these devices are occupied even if the ten keys are not connected, they cannot be used for any other purpose. 2) Eleven bit devices are occupied from D2 for outputting the key pressing information.
PAGE 427
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC 71 – HKY / Hexadecimal Input FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 15.2 15.2 FNC 71 – HKY / Hexadecimal Input Outline 1.
PAGE 428
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1) 15.2 FNC 71 – HKY / Hexadecimal Input Input of a numeric value through keys 0 to 9: - When an input value is larger than "9999", it overflows from the most significant digit. - The numeric value input is stored to D2 - The key sensing output D3 2) in binary. +7 turns ON when any key 0 to 9 is pressed.
PAGE 429
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.2 FNC 71 – HKY / Hexadecimal Input 11 Hexadecimal numerical value data input using keys 0 to F is shifted into [ D2 byte. 1) +1, D2 ] from the least significant Input of a numeric value using keys 0 to F: - When the input value is larger than "FFFFFFFF", it overflows from the most significant digit.
PAGE 430
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.2 FNC 71 – HKY / Hexadecimal Input Program example S X004 FNC 71 HKY X000 D1 D2 D3 Y000 D 0 M 0 The figure below shows an example of the FX3U series main unit (sink input/sink output). For wiring details, refer to the following manual.
PAGE 431
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC 72 – DSW / Digital Switch (Thumbwheel Input) FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 15.3 15.3 FNC 72 – DSW / Digital Switch (Thumbwheel Input) Outline This instruction reads the set value of digital switches. This instruction can read a set of 4 digits (n = K1) or two sets of 4 digits (n = K2). 12 FNC40-FNC49 Data Operation 1.
PAGE 432
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2) 15.
PAGE 433
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.3 FNC 72 – DSW / Digital Switch (Thumbwheel Input) 11 FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 2. Connection diagram The figure below shows an example of the FX3U series main unit (sink input/sink output). For wiring details, refer to the Hardware Edition of each PLC. BCD type digital switch 101 102 103 BCD type digital switch Diode of 0.1 A, 50 V is required.
PAGE 434
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.4 FNC 73 – SEGD / Seven Segment Decoder 15.4 FNC 73 – SEGD / Seven Segment Decoder Outline This instruction decodes data, and turns the seven-segment display unit (1 digit) ON. 1.
PAGE 435
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.4 FNC 73 – SEGD / Seven Segment Decoder 11 S D b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 0 4 Seven-segment configuration B15 ...
PAGE 436
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.5 15.5 FNC 74 – SEGL / Seven Segment With Latch FNC 74 – SEGL / Seven Segment With Latch Outline This instruction controls one or two sets of 4-digit seven-segment display units having the latch function. 1.
PAGE 437
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.5 FNC 74 – SEGL / Seven Segment With Latch 11 Example of connecting one seven-segment display unit The figure below shows an example of the FX3U series main unit (sink output). For wiring details, refer to the Hardware Edition of each PLC.
PAGE 438
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.5 FNC 74 – SEGL / Seven Segment With Latch Cautions 1. Time to update the 4-digit seven-segment display The scan time (operation cycle) multiplied by 12 is required to update (one or two sets of) the 4-digit display. 2. Operation when the command input turns OFF While the command input is ON, the operation is repeated.
PAGE 439
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 How to select a seven-segment display unit When selecting a seven-segment display unit based on its electrical characteristics, refer to the manual below: → For the wiring, refer to the Hardware Edition of the PLC used. 1. Points to be checked for the seven-segment specifications 1) 15.5.
PAGE 440
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.5 FNC 74 – SEGL / Seven Segment With Latch 3.
PAGE 441
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC 75 – ARWS / Arrow Switch FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 15.6 15.6 FNC 75 – ARWS / Arrow Switch Outline This instruction inputs data through arrow switches used for shifting the digit and incrementing/decrementing the numeric value in each digit. FNC40-FNC49 Data Operation 1.
PAGE 442
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.
PAGE 443
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.6 FNC 75 – ARWS / Arrow Switch 11 1. Setting of the parameter "n" Refer to the explanation of parameter setting in the SEGL (FNC 74) instruction. The setting range is from 0 to 3 for the ARWS instruction. → For the parameter setting, refer to Subsection 15.5.2. Use a transistor output type PLC. 3.
PAGE 444
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.
PAGE 445
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC 76 – ASC / ASCII Code Data Input FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 15.7 15.7 FNC 76 – ASC / ASCII Code Data Input Outline This instruction converts a half-width alphanumeric character string into ASCII codes. Use this instruction for selecting one among two or more messages and displaying it on an external display unit. 12 FNC40-FNC49 Data Operation 1.
PAGE 446
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.7 FNC 76 – ASC / ASCII Code Data Input Extension function When M8161 is set to ON for making the extension function valid, a half-width alphanumeric character string specified in is converted into ASCII codes, and transferred in turn only to low-order 8 bits (1 byte) of S Command input D .
PAGE 447
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC 77 – PR / Print (ASCII Code) FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 15.8 15.8 FNC 77 – PR / Print (ASCII Code) Outline This instruction outputs ASCII code data to outputs (Y) in parallel. 12 FNC 77 PR Mnemonic 16-bit Instruction 5 steps Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Continuous Operation PR FNC40-FNC49 Data Operation 1.
PAGE 448
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.8 FNC 77 – PR / Print (ASCII Code) Extension function 1. 16-byte serial output The number of output characters varies depending on the ON/OFF status of the special auxiliary relay M8027. While M8027 is OFF, 8-byte serial output (fixed to 8 characters) is executed. While M8027 is ON, 16-byte serial output (1 to 16 characters) is executed.
PAGE 449
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.8 FNC 77 – PR / Print (ASCII Code) 11 1. Command input and instruction operation While the command input is ON: 2. Relationship with the scan time (operation cycle) This instruction is executed in synchronization with the scan time. If the scan time is short, the constant scan mode can be used. If the scan mode is too long, the timer interrupt function can be used.
PAGE 450
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.9 15.9 FNC 78 – FROM / Read From A Special Function Block FNC 78 – FROM / Read From A Special Function Block Outline This instruction reads the contents of buffer memories (BMF) in a special function unit/block attached to a PLC. When a large capacity of buffer memory (BFM) data is read by this instruction, a watchdog timer error may occur.
PAGE 451
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.9 FNC 78 – FROM / Read From A Special Function Block 11 Special extension unit/block (BFM) → PLC (word device) "n" 32-bit data starting from the buffer memory (BFM) # [m2+1, m2] inside a special extension unit/block No. m1 are transferred (read) to "n" devices starting from [ D Command input D ] inside a PLC.
PAGE 452
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.9 FNC 78 – FROM / Read From A Special Function Block Program examples In programs, the contents of buffer memories (BFMs) in special extension units/blocks are read (transferred) to data registers (D), extension registers (R) and auxiliary relays (M) with digit specification using the FROM instruction and direct specification of buffer memories*1. *1.
PAGE 453
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 Common items between FROM instruction and TO instruction (details) FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 15.9.1 15.9 FNC 78 – FROM / Read From A Special Function Block Contents specified by operands 1. Unit number "m1" of a special extension unit/block 12 Unit No. 0 Built-in CC-Link/LT I/O extension block Unit No.
PAGE 454
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.9 FNC 78 – FROM / Read From A Special Function Block Acceptance of interrupts while FROM/TO instruction is executed (M8028) 1. While M8028 is OFF While a FROM/TO instruction is being executed, interrupts are automatically disabled. Input interrupts and timer interrupts are not executed.
PAGE 455
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.10 FNC 79 – TO / Write To A Special Function Block 11 FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 15.10 FNC 79 – TO / Write To A Special Function Block Outline 1.
PAGE 456
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.10 FNC 79 – TO / Write To A Special Function Block 2. 32-bit operation (DTO and DTOP) PLC (word device) → Special extension unit/block (BFM) "n"-point 32-bit data starting from [ S , S +1] inside a PLC are transferred (written) to "n"-point buffer memories starting from the buffer memory (BFM) # [m2+1, m2] inside a special extension unit/block No. m1.
PAGE 457
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 16. External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 12 Mnemonic Symbol 80 RS 81 PRUN 82 ASCI ASCI 83 HEX 84 CCD 85 VRRD 86 VRSC 87 RS2 88 PID 89 – Function Reference Serial Communication Section 16.1 Parallel Run (Octal Mode) Section 16.2 S D n Hexadecimal to ASCII Conversion Section 16.
PAGE 458
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.1 16.1 FNC 80 – RS / Serial Communication FNC 80 – RS / Serial Communication Outline This instruction sends and receives data using non-protocol communication by way of a serial port (only ch1) in accordance with RS-232C or RS-485 provided in the main unit. 1.
PAGE 459
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.1 FNC 80 – RS / Serial Communication 11 → For detailed explanation, refer to the Data Communication Edition manual.
PAGE 460
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.2 16.2 FNC 81 – PRUN / Parallel Run (Octal Mode) FNC 81 – PRUN / Parallel Run (Octal Mode) Outline This instruction handles the device number of numbers, and transfers data. with digit specification and the device number of S D as octal 1.
PAGE 461
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.
PAGE 462
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.3 16.3 FNC 82 – ASCI / Hexadecimal to ASCII Conversion FNC 82 – ASCI / Hexadecimal to ASCII Conversion Outline This instruction converts hexadecimal code into ASCII code. On the other hand, BINDA (FNC261) instruction converts binary data into ASCII code, and ESTR (FNC116) instruction converts binary floating point data into ASCII code.
PAGE 463
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.3 FNC 82 – ASCI / Hexadecimal to ASCII Conversion 11 Each digit of hexadecimal data stored in and later is converted into ASCII code, and transferred to the high- S order 8 bits and low-order 8 bits of each device specified by "n". and later.
PAGE 464
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.3 FNC 82 – ASCI / Hexadecimal to ASCII Conversion 3. 8-bit conversion mode (while M8161 is ON) (M8161 is used also for the RS, HEX, CCD and CRC instructions.) Each digit of hexadecimal data stored in 8 bits of each device and later is converted into an ASCII code, and transferred to low-order S and later.
PAGE 465
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC 83 – HEX / ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 16.4 16.4 FNC 83 – HEX / ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion Outline 1. Instruction format 13 Mnemonic 16-bit Instruction P Operation Condition HEXP Operation Condition − − Continuous Operation Pulse (Single) Operation HEX 7 steps 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic 14 2.
PAGE 466
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.4 FNC 83 – HEX / ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion 2. 16-bit conversion mode (while M8161 is OFF) (M8161 is used also for the RS, ASCI, CCD, and CRC instructions.) Each ASCII code stored in high-order 8 bits and low-order 8 bits of devices and later is converted into a S hexadecimal code, and transferred to devices D and later in units of 4 digits.
PAGE 467
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.
PAGE 468
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.5 16.5 FNC 84 – CCD / Check Code FNC 84 – CCD / Check Code Outline This instruction calculates the horizontal parity value and sum check value in the error check methods used in communication. There is another check method, CRC (cyclic redundancy check) also. For obtaining CRC value, use CRC instruction. → For CRC instruction, refer to Section 24.4.
PAGE 469
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.5 FNC 84 – CCD / Check Code 11 With regard to "n" data starting from S , the addition data and horizontal parity data of high-order 8 bits and low- order 8 bits are stored to D and D +1 respectively. M8161 is used also for the RS, ASCI, HEX and CRC instructions. When using the 16-bit mode, set M8161 to normally OFF.
PAGE 470
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.5 FNC 84 – CCD / Check Code 3. 8-bit conversion mode (while M8161 is ON) (M8161 is used also for the RS, ASCI, HEX and CRC instructions.) With regard to "n" data starting from S , the addition data and horizontal parity data of only low-order 8 bits are stored to D and D +1 respectively. M8161 is also used for the RS, ASCI, HEX and CRC instructions.
PAGE 471
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC 85 - VRRD / Volume Read FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 16.6 16.6 FNC 85 - VRRD / Volume Read Outline 12 This instruction reads the analog value of a variable analog potentiometer board attached to the PLC main unit.
PAGE 472
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.6 FNC 85 - VRRD / Volume Read 2. Example in which the analog values of the variable analog potentiometers Nos. 0 to 7 are read in turn, and used as analog timers K0 to K7 are specified in SS1 of the VRRD instruction in accordance with the values of the variable potentiometers VR0 to VR7.
PAGE 473
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC 86 - VRSC / Volume Scale FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 16.7 16.7 FNC 86 - VRSC / Volume Scale Outline 12 1.
PAGE 474
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.7 FNC 86 - VRSC / Volume Scale Program example 1. Example in which the scale value is used as a rotary switch One of the auxiliary relays from M0 to M10 turns ON in accordance with the scale value ranging from 0 to 10 of the specified variable analog potentiometer.
PAGE 475
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC 87 – RS2 / Serial Communication 2 FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 16.8 16.8 FNC 87 – RS2 / Serial Communication 2 Outline 1. Instruction format 16-bit Instruction 11 steps Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Continuous Operation RS2 Operation Condition − 2. Set data Operand type m D n *1.
PAGE 476
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Related devices → For detailed explanation, refer to the Data Communication Edition. Device ch0*1 ch1 M8371 M8401 16.
PAGE 477
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.8 FNC 87 – RS2 / Serial Communication 2 11 Item RS2 instruction RS instruction Remarks 1 to 4 characters (bytes) Up to 1 character (byte) Terminator size 1 to 4 characters (bytes) Up to 1 character (byte) Attachment of check sum The check sum can be automatically attached. The check sum should be attached by a user program.
PAGE 478
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.9 16.9 FNC 88 – PID / PID Control Loop FNC 88 – PID / PID Control Loop Outline This instruction executes PID control which changes the output value according to the input variation. → For details, refer to the Analog Control Edition. 1.
PAGE 479
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.9 FNC 88 – PID / PID Control Loop 11 Set item Target value (SV) S2 Measured value (PV) • • • Set the target value (SV). PID instruction does not change the contents of setting.
PAGE 480
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Set item S3 +20*1 Setting Value Input variation (incremental) alarm set value Input variation (decremental) S3 +21*1 alarm set value S3 +22*1 Output variation (incremental) alarm set value Output upper limit set value S3 +23*1 16.9 FNC 88 – PID / PID Control Loop 0 to 32767 It is valid when bit 1 is set to "1" in the operation setting (ACT).
PAGE 481
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.9 FNC 88 – PID / PID Control Loop 11 1. When using two or more PID instructions Two or more PID instructions can be executed at the same time. (There is no limitation in the number of loops.) However, make sure that S3 , D and other operands specified in each instruction are different to each other. 2.
PAGE 482
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 17 Data Transfer 2 – FNC100 to FNC109 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 17. Data Transfer 2 – FNC100 to FNC109 FNC100 to FNC109 provide instructions for executing complicated processing for fundamental applied instructions and for executing special processing. 480 FNC No.
PAGE 483
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 17 Data Transfer 2 – FNC100 to FNC109 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC102 – ZPUSH/Batch Store of Index Register FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 17.1 17.1 FNC102 – ZPUSH/Batch Store of Index Register Outline 1. Instruction format FNC 102 ZPUSH P 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition ZPUSH 3 steps 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic − 2.
PAGE 484
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 17 Data Transfer 2 – FNC100 to FNC109 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4) 17.1 FNC102 – ZPUSH/Batch Store of Index Register The figure below shows the data structure batch-stored in D and later.
PAGE 485
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 17 Data Transfer 2 – FNC100 to FNC109 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 17.1 FNC102 – ZPUSH/Batch Store of Index Register 11 In the program shown below, the contents of the index registers Z0 to Z7 and V0 to V7 before execution of subroutine program are batch-stored in D0 and later when index registers are used in the subroutine after the pointer P0.
PAGE 486
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 17 Data Transfer 2 – FNC100 to FNC109 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 17.2 17.2 FNC103 – ZPOP/Batch POP of Index Register FNC103 – ZPOP/Batch POP of Index Register Outline This instruction restores the contents of the index registers V0 to V7 and Z0 to Z8 which were batch-stored temporarily by ZPUSH (FNC102) instruction. → For ZPUSH (FNC102) instruction, refer to Section 17.1. 1.
PAGE 487
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 18. Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 110 ECMP ECMP S1 S2 D 111 EZCP EZCP S1 S2 S D 112 EMOV EMOV S D 113 – – 114 – – 115 – – Floating Point Compare Section 18.1 Floating Point Zone Compare Section 18.2 Floating Point Move Section 18.3 13 Section 18.
PAGE 488
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 486 FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 129 INT INT S D Floating Point to Integer Conversion Section 18.17 130 SIN SIN S D Floating Point Sine Section 18.18 131 COS COS S D Floating Point Cosine Section 18.19 132 TAN TAN S D Floating Point Tangent Section 18.20 133 ASIN ASIN S D Floating Point Arc Sine Section 18.
PAGE 489
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC110 – ECMP / Floating Point Compare FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 18.1 18.1 FNC110 – ECMP / Floating Point Compare Outline 1. Instruction format FNC 110 ECMP P D 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition Operation Condition 13 steps DECMP DECMPP Continuous Operation Pulse (Single) Operation − 2.
PAGE 490
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.2 18.2 FNC111 – EZCP / Floating Point Zone Compare FNC111 – EZCP / Floating Point Zone Compare Outline This instruction compares data (binary floating point) with two values (one zone), and outputs the comparison result to three consecutive bit devices. → For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3. 1.
PAGE 491
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.2 FNC111 – EZCP / Floating Point Zone Compare 11 1. 32-bit operation (DEZCP and DEZCPP) The comparison values [ S1 +1, S1 ], [ S2 +1, ] are compared with the comparison source [ S S2 S ] as floating point data, and one of the bits among result (smaller, same or larger).
PAGE 492
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.3 18.3 FNC112 – EMOV / Floating Point Move FNC112 – EMOV / Floating Point Move Outline This instruction transfers binary floating point data. → For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3. 1.
PAGE 493
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC116 – ESTR / Floating Point to Character String Conversion FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 18.4 18.4 FNC116 – ESTR / Floating Point to Character String Conversion Outline 13 1.
PAGE 494
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.4 FNC116 – ESTR / Floating Point to Character String Conversion 2.
PAGE 495
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.4 FNC116 – ESTR / Floating Point to Character String Conversion 11 0: Decimal point format S2 +1 8 (Total number of digits) S2 +2 2 (Number of digits of decimal part) S1 +1 Total number of digits 1 12 FNC40-FNC49 Data Operation S2 2 3 Low-order digits of decimal part S1 Automatically added. −1.
PAGE 496
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.4 FNC116 – ESTR / Floating Point to Character String Conversion • The number of digits of the decimal part which can be specified by S2 +2 is from 0 to 7. However, the following must be satisfied, "Number of digits of decimal part ≤ (Total number of digits - 7)" For example, when the total number of digits is "12", the number of digits of the decimal part is "4", and "-12.
PAGE 497
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.4 FNC116 – ESTR / Floating Point to Character String Conversion 11 Total number of digits (12) 1 S2 S2 +1 12 S2 +2 4 Fixed to 2 digits. 1 12 2 3 4 6E+ 0 1 FNC40-FNC49 Data Operation +1 S1 FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift - The exponent part is fixed to 2 digits. When the exponent part is 1 digit, "30H (0)" is stored after the sign of the exponent part.
PAGE 498
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.
PAGE 499
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC117 – EVAL / Character String to Floating Point Conversion FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 18.5 18.5 FNC117 – EVAL / Character String to Floating Point Conversion Outline 1.
PAGE 500
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.5 FNC117 – EVAL / Character String to Floating Point Conversion a) In the case of decimal point format b15 S b8 b7 b0 31H(1) 2DH(-) S +1 30H(0) 2EH(.) S +2 38H(8) 37H(7) S +3 32H(2) 31H(1) S +4 +1 D D −1.07812 Binary floating point (real number) 00H 1 0 7 8 1 2 b) In the case of exponent format b15 S b8 b7 b0 20H(space) 2DH(-) S +1 2EH(.
PAGE 501
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.5 FNC117 – EVAL / Character String to Floating Point Conversion 11 b15 b8 b7 S b0 20H(.) 2DH(-) 2EH(.) 31H(1) S +2 35H(5) 33H(3) S +3 33H(3) 30H(0) S +4 31H(1) 34H(4) S +5 45H(E) 32H(2) S +6 30H(0) 2DH(-) 00H 32H(2) 3 5 0 3 4 1 2E D +1 12 D −1.35034E−2 Up to 6 digits are securely equivalent.
PAGE 502
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.5 FNC117 – EVAL / Character String to Floating Point Conversion Related devices → For the use methods of the zero, borrow and carry flags, refer to Subsection 6.5.2. Description Device Name M8020 Zero flag M8021 Borrow flag The absolute value of the conversion result The value of D is the minimum value (2−126) of 32-bit real is less than "2−126".
PAGE 503
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.
PAGE 504
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.6 18.6 FNC118 – EBCD / Floating Point to Scientific Notation Conversion FNC118 – EBCD / Floating Point to Scientific Notation Conversion Outline This instruction converts binary floating point into scientific notation. → For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3. 1.
PAGE 505
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC119 – EBIN / Scientific Notation to Floating Point Conversion FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 18.7 18.7 FNC119 – EBIN / Scientific Notation to Floating Point Conversion Outline 1.
PAGE 506
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.7 FNC119 – EBIN / Scientific Notation to Floating Point Conversion Program example By DEBIN instruction, a numeric value containing the decimal point can be directly converted into binary floating point. Example: Converting "3.14" into binary floating point 3.
PAGE 507
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC120 – EADD / Floating Point Addition FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 18.8 18.8 FNC120 – EADD / Floating Point Addition Outline 1. Instruction format 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 13 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 13 steps DEADD DEADDP Continuous Operation Pulse (Single) Operation − 2.
PAGE 508
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.9 18.9 FNC121 – ESUB / Floating Point Subtraction FNC121 – ESUB / Floating Point Subtraction Outline This instruction executes subtraction of two binary floating point data. → For program examples of floating point operations, refer to Section 12.10. → For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3. → For flag operations, refer to Subsection 6.5.2. 1.
PAGE 509
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.10 FNC122 – EMUL / Floating Point Multiplication 11 FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 18.10 FNC122 – EMUL / Floating Point Multiplication Outline 1. Instruction format FNC 122 EMUL P D 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition Operation Condition 13 steps DEMUL DEMULP Continuous Operation Pulse (Single) Operation − 2.
PAGE 510
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.11 FNC123 – EDIV / Floating Point Division 18.11 FNC123 – EDIV / Floating Point Division Outline This instruction executes division of two binary floating point. → For program examples of floating point operations, refer to Section 12.10. → For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3. → For flag operations, refer to Subsection 6.5.2. 1.
PAGE 511
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.12 FNC124 – EXP / Floating Point Exponent 11 FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 18.12 FNC124 – EXP / Floating Point Exponent Outline 1. Instruction format FNC 124 P EXP D 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Continuous Operation Pulse (Single) Operation 9 steps DEXP DEXPP 2.
PAGE 512
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.12 FNC124 – EXP / Floating Point Exponent Program example In the program example shown below, the exponential operation is executed for a value set in the 2-digit BCD format in X020 to X027, and the operation result is stored in the binary floating point format to D0 and D1 when X000 turns ON.
PAGE 513
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.13 FNC125 – LOGE / Floating Point Natural Logarithm 11 FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 18.13 FNC125 – LOGE / Floating Point Natural Logarithm Outline 1. Instruction format FNC 125 LOGE P D 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition Operation Condition 9 steps DLOGE DLOGEP Continuous Operation Pulse (Single) Operation − − 2.
PAGE 514
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.13 FNC125 – LOGE / Floating Point Natural Logarithm Program example In the program example shown below, natural logarithm of "10" set in D50 is calculated, and stored to D30 and D31 when X000 turns ON. X000 FNC 12 MOV K10 D50 Data used in the natural logarithm operation is set ([1]).
PAGE 515
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.14 FNC126 – LOG10 / Floating Point Common Logarithm 11 FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 18.14 FNC126 – LOG10 / Floating Point Common Logarithm Outline 1. Instruction format FNC 126 LOG10 P D 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Continuous Operation Pulse (Single) Operation 9 steps DLOG10 DLOG10P 2.
PAGE 516
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.14 FNC126 – LOG10 / Floating Point Common Logarithm Program example In the program example shown below, common logarithm of "15" set in D50 is calculated, and stored to D30 and D31 when X000 turns ON. X000 FNC 12 MOV K15 D50 Data used in the common logarithm operation is set ([1]).
PAGE 517
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.15 FNC127 – ESQR / Floating Point Square Root 11 FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 18.15 FNC127 – ESQR / Floating Point Square Root Outline 1. Instruction format FNC 127 ESQR P D 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition Operation Condition 9 steps DESQR DESQRP Continuous Operation Pulse (Single) Operation − Data Type Real number (binary)*1 14 2.
PAGE 518
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.16 FNC128 – ENEG / Floating Point Negation 18.16 FNC128 – ENEG / Floating Point Negation Outline This instruction inverts the sign of binary floating point (real number) data. → For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3. 1.
PAGE 519
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.17 FNC129 – INT / Floating Point to Integer Conversion 11 FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 18.17 FNC129 – INT / Floating Point to Integer Conversion Outline 1.
PAGE 520
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.17 FNC129 – INT / Floating Point to Integer Conversion Related devices → For the methods of zero, borrow and carry flags, refer to Subsection 6.5.2. Device Name M8020 Zero flag M8021 Borrow flag M8022 Carry flag Description Turns ON when the operation result is 0 Turns ON when the conversion result is cut in the decimal part.
PAGE 521
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.18 FNC130 – SIN / Floating Point Sine 11 FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 18.18 FNC130 – SIN / Floating Point Sine Outline 1.
PAGE 522
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.19 FNC131 – COS / Floating Point Cosine 18.19 FNC131 – COS / Floating Point Cosine Outline This instruction obtains the cosine value of an angle (in radians). → For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3. 1.
PAGE 523
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.20 FNC132 – TAN / Floating Point Tangent 11 FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 18.20 FNC132 – TAN / Floating Point Tangent Outline 1. Instruction format FNC 132 P TAN D 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 2.
PAGE 524
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.21 FNC133 – ASIN / Floating Point Arc Sine 18.21 FNC133 – ASIN / Floating Point Arc Sine Outline This instruction executes SIN−1 (arc sine) operation. → For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3. 1.
PAGE 525
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.21 FNC133 – ASIN / Floating Point Arc Sine 11 In the program example shown below, the SIN−1 value of data (binary floating point) stored in D0 and D1 is calculated, and the angle is output in 4-digit BCD to Y040 to Y057 when X000 turns ON. X000 FNC133 DASIN D0 D10 The angle (in radians) is calculated by the SIN−1 operation ([1]).
PAGE 526
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.22 FNC134 – ACOS / Floating Point Arc Cosine 18.22 FNC134 – ACOS / Floating Point Arc Cosine Outline This instruction executes COS−1 (arc cosine) operation. → For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3. 1.
PAGE 527
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.22 FNC134 – ACOS / Floating Point Arc Cosine 11 In the program example shown below, the COS−1 value of data (binary floating point) stored in D0 and D1 is calculated, and the angle is output in 4-digit BCD to Y040 to Y057 when X000 turns ON. X000 FNC134 DACOS D0 D10 The angle (in radians) is calculated by the COS−1 operation ([1]).
PAGE 528
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.23 FNC135 – ATAN / Floating Point Arc Tangent 18.23 FNC135 – ATAN / Floating Point Arc Tangent Outline This instruction executes the TAN−1 (arc tangent) operation. → For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3. 1.
PAGE 529
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.23 FNC135 – ATAN / Floating Point Arc Tangent 11 In the program example shown below, the TAN−1 value of data (binary floating point) stored in D0 and D1 is calculated, and the angle is output in 4-digit BCD to Y040 to Y057 when X000 turns ON. X000 FNC135 DATAN D0 D10 The angle (in radians) is calculated by the TAN−1 operation ([1]).
PAGE 530
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.24 FNC136 – RAD / Floating Point Degrees to Radians Conversion 18.24 FNC136 – RAD / Floating Point Degrees to Radians Conversion Outline This instruction converts a value in degrees into a value in radians. → For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3. 1.
PAGE 531
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.24 FNC136 – RAD / Floating Point Degrees to Radians Conversion 11 In the program example shown below, a 4-digit BCD value set in degrees in X020 to X037 is converted into a binary floating point value in radians, and stored to D20 and D21 when X000 turns ON. X000 FNC 19 BIN K4X20 D0 Angle to be converted into radians is input ([1]).
PAGE 532
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.25 FNC137 – DEG / Floating Point Radians to Degrees Conversion 18.25 FNC137 – DEG / Floating Point Radians to Degrees Conversion Outline This instruction converts a value in radians into a value in degrees. → For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3. 1.
PAGE 533
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 19. Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 Symbol Function Reference 140 WSUM WSUM S D n Sum of Word Data Section 19.1 141 WTOB WTOB S D n WORD to BYTE Section 19.2 142 BTOW BTOW S D n BYTE to WORD Section 19.3 143 UNI UNI S D n 4-bit Linking of Word Data Section 19.
PAGE 534
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.1 FNC140 – WSUM / Sum of Word Data 19.1 FNC140 – WSUM / Sum of Word Data Outline This instruction calculates the sum of consecutive 16-bit or 32-bit data. When calculating the addition data (sum value) in units of byte (8 bits), use the CCD (FNC 84) instruction. → For CCD (FNC 84) instruction, refer to Section 16.5. 1.
PAGE 535
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.1 FNC140 – WSUM / Sum of Word Data 11 Instruction FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift Related instruction Description CCD (FNC 84) Check code Calculates the sum of 16-bit data in units of byte (8 bits) and the horizontal parity. 12 Caution • Note that the 32-bit value [n+1, n] is valid when D or R is specified as "n" in a 32-bit instruction.
PAGE 536
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.2 19.2 FNC141 – WTOB / WORD to BYTE FNC141 – WTOB / WORD to BYTE Outline This instruction separates consecutive 16-bit data in byte units (8 bits). 1. Instruction format FNC 141 WTOB P 16-bit Instruction 7 steps Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic WTOB WTOBP Operation Condition − − Continuous Operation Pulse (Single) Operation 2.
PAGE 537
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.2 FNC141 – WTOB / WORD to BYTE 11 When "n" is an odd number, only the low-order byte (8 bits) of the final separation source device is regarded as the target data as shown in the figure below. For example, when "n" is "5", the data from b15 S S to the low-order byte (8 bits) of +2 is stored in S D to +4.
PAGE 538
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.3 19.3 FNC142 – BTOW / BYTE to WORD FNC142 – BTOW / BYTE to WORD Outline This instruction combines the low-order 8 bits (low-order byte) of consecutive 16-bit data. 1.
PAGE 539
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.3 FNC142 – BTOW / BYTE to WORD 11 Instruction FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift Related instruction Description WTOB (FNC141) Separates consecutive 16-bit data in byte units (8 bits). Caution b15 S b8 b7 b0 ABH CDH EFH ABH CDH EFH b15 12H 34H 56H 78H 9AH BCH D The high-order bytes is ignored.
PAGE 540
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.4 19.4 FNC143 – UNI / 4-bit Linking of Word Data FNC143 – UNI / 4-bit Linking of Word Data Outline This instruction combines the low-order 4 bits of consecutive 16-bit data. 1.
PAGE 541
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.4 FNC143 – UNI / 4-bit Linking of Word Data 11 Instruction FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift Related instruction Description DIS (FNC144) Separates 16-bit data in 4-bit units.
PAGE 542
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.5 19.5 FNC144 – DIS / 4-bit Grouping of Word Data FNC144 – DIS / 4-bit Grouping of Word Data Outline This instruction separates 16-bit data into 4 bit units. 1. Instruction format FNC 144 P DIS Mnemonic 16-bit Instruction Operation Condition DIS 7 steps 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic DISP Operation Condition − − Continuous Operation Pulse (Single) Operation 2.
PAGE 543
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.5 FNC144 – DIS / 4-bit Grouping of Word Data 11 An operation error occurs in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is stored in D8067.
PAGE 544
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.6 19.6 FNC147 – SWAP / Byte Swap FNC147 – SWAP / Byte Swap Outline This instruction swaps the high-order 8 bits and low-order 8 bits of a word device. 1.
PAGE 545
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC149 – SORT2 / Sort Tabulated Data 2 FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 19.7 19.7 FNC149 – SORT2 / Sort Tabulated Data 2 Outline 13 1.
PAGE 546
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.7 FNC149 – SORT2 / Sort Tabulated Data 2 The data table configuration is explained in an example in which the sorting source data table has 3 lines and 4 columns (m1 = K3, m2 = K4). For the sorting result data table, understand Column No. D . Number of groups (m2 = K4) Line No.
PAGE 547
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.7 FNC149 – SORT2 / Sort Tabulated Data 2 11 When the instruction is executed with "n = K2 (column No. 2)" and "n = K3 (column No. 3)" for the following sorting source data, the operations shown below result. The operation examples below indicate 16-bit operations. In the case of 32-bit operation, construct the data table with 32-bit binary data.
PAGE 548
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.7 FNC149 – SORT2 / Sort Tabulated Data 2 Related devices → For the instruction execution complete flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2. Device Name M8029 Instruction execution complete Description M8165 Descending order Turns ON when data sorting is completed. Sorts data in the descending order when set to ON. Sorts data in the ascending order when set to OFF.
PAGE 549
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 20. Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function 150 DSZR DSZR S1 S2 D1 D2 DOG Search Zero Return Section 20.1 151 DVIT DVIT Interrupt Positioning Section 20.2 152 TBL Batch Data Positioning Mode Section 20.
PAGE 550
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.1 20.1 FNC150 – DSZR / Dog Search Zero Return FNC150 – DSZR / Dog Search Zero Return Outline This instruction executes a zero return, and aligns the mechanical position with a present value register inside the PLC.
PAGE 551
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.1 FNC150 – DSZR / Dog Search Zero Return 11 Special high-speed output adapter No. No. 1 (1st unit) Rotation direction output D1 =Y000 D2 =Y004 D1 =Y001 D2 =Y005 D1 =Y002 D2 =Y006 D1 =Y003 D2 =Y007 12 FNC40-FNC49 Data Operation No.
PAGE 552
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.2 20.2 FNC151 – DVIT / Interrupt Positioning FNC151 – DVIT / Interrupt Positioning Outline This instruction executes one-speed interrupt constant quantity feed. → For explanation of the instruction, refer to the Positioning Control Edition manual. → For cautions on using special high-speed output adapters, refer to the Positioning Control Edition manual. 1.
PAGE 553
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.2 FNC151 – DVIT / Interrupt Positioning 11 Special high-speed output adapter No. No. 1 (1st unit) Rotation direction output D1 =Y000 D2 =Y004 D1 =Y001 D2 =Y005 D1 =Y002 D2 =Y006 D1 =Y003 D2 =Y007 12 FNC40-FNC49 Data Operation No. 2 (2nd unit) Pulse output 13 S3 : "D .b" cannot be indexed with index registers (V and Z).
PAGE 554
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.3 20.3 FNC152 – TBL / Batch Data Positioning Mode FNC152 – TBL / Batch Data Positioning Mode Outline This instruction executes one specified table operation from the data table set in GX Works2 etc. → For explanation of the instruction, refer to the Positioning Control Edition manual.
PAGE 555
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11 FNC155 – ABS / Absolute Current Value Read FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift 20.4 20.4 FNC155 – ABS / Absolute Current Value Read Outline 1. Instruction format 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction − 13 steps Mnemonic Operation Condition Continuous Operation DABS 2.
PAGE 556
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.5 20.5 FNC156 – ZRN / Zero Return FNC156 – ZRN / Zero Return Outline This instruction executes a zero return, and aligns the mechanical position with a present value register inside the PLC. When the dog search function is required, use DSZR (FNC150) instruction. → For explanation of the instruction, refer to the Positioning Control Edition manual.
PAGE 557
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.5 FNC156 – ZRN / Zero Return 11 Command input FNC156 ZRN S1 S2 S3 FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift Explanation of function and operation D 12 During RUN, avoid writing while the ZRN (FNC156) instruction is executed (that is, while pulses are output).
PAGE 558
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.6 20.6 FNC157 – PLSV / Variable Speed Pulse Output FNC157 – PLSV / Variable Speed Pulse Output Outline This instruction outputs variable speed pulses with an assigned rotation direction. → For explanation of the instruction, refer to the Positioning Control Edition manual.
PAGE 559
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.6 FNC157 – PLSV / Variable Speed Pulse Output 11 FNC30-FNC39 Rotation and Shift S3 : "D .b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available. S4 : This function is supported only in FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs. S5 : This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
PAGE 560
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.7 20.7 FNC158 – DRVI / Drive to Increment FNC158 – DRVI / Drive to Increment Outline This instruction executes one-speed positioning by incremental drive. The movement distance from the present position can be specified, positive or negative. → For explanation of the instruction, refer to the Positioning Control Edition manual.
PAGE 561
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.7 FNC158 – DRVI / Drive to Increment 11 Special high-speed output adapter No. No. 2 (2nd unit) 12 Rotation direction output D1 =Y000 D2 =Y004 D1 =Y001 D2 =Y005 D1 =Y002 D2 =Y006 D1 =Y003 D2 =Y007 FNC40-FNC49 Data Operation No. 1 (1st unit) Pulse output 13 FNC50-FNC59 High-Speed Processing S3 : "D .b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
PAGE 562
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.8 20.8 FNC159 – DRVA / Drive to Absolute FNC159 – DRVA / Drive to Absolute Outline This instruction executes one-speed positioning by absolute drive. The movement distance from the zero point can be specified. → For explanation of the instruction, refer to the Positioning Control Edition manual.
PAGE 563
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.8 FNC159 – DRVA / Drive to Absolute 11 Special high-speed output adapter No. No. 2 (2nd unit) 12 Rotation direction output D1 =Y000 D2 =Y004 D1 =Y001 D2 =Y005 D1 =Y002 D2 =Y006 D1 =Y003 D2 =Y007 FNC40-FNC49 Data Operation No. 1 (1st unit) Pulse output 13 FNC50-FNC59 High-Speed Processing S3 : "D .b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
PAGE 564
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21. Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 FNC160 to FNC169 provide operation and comparison instructions for the time data. These instructions can set the time of the built-in PLC real time clock, and converts the format of the time data. 562 FNC No.
PAGE 565
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21 FNC160 – TCMP / RTC Data Compare FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control 21.1 21.1 FNC160 – TCMP / RTC Data Compare Outline This instruction compares the comparison time with the time data, and turns ON or OFF bit devices according to the comparison result.
PAGE 566
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.1 FNC160 – TCMP / RTC Data Compare Explanation of function and operation 1. 16-bit operation (TCMP) The comparison time (hour, minute, and second) stored in S1 (hour, minute, and second) stored in S OFF according to the comparison result.
PAGE 567
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21 FNC161 – TZCP / RTC Data Zone Compare FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control 21.2 21.2 FNC161 – TZCP / RTC Data Zone Compare Outline This instruction compares two comparison time (comparison time zone) with the time data, and turns ON or OFF the specified bit devices according to the comparison results.
PAGE 568
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.2 FNC161 – TZCP / RTC Data Zone Compare Cautions 1. Number of occupied devices Three devices are occupied respectively by S1 , S2 , S3 , and D . Make sure that these devices are not used in other controls for the machine. 2.
PAGE 569
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21 FNC162 – TADD / RTC Data Addition FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control 21.3 21.3 FNC162 – TADD / RTC Data Addition Outline This instruction executes addition of two time data, and stores the addition result to word devices.
PAGE 570
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.3 FNC162 – TADD / RTC Data Addition Cautions 1. Number of occupied devices Three devices are occupied by S1 , S2 and D respectively. Make sure that these devices are not used in other controls for the machine. 2.
PAGE 571
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21 FNC163 – TSUB / RTC Data Subtraction FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control 21.4 21.4 FNC163 – TSUB / RTC Data Subtraction Outline This instruction executes subtraction of two time data, and stores the subtraction result to word devices.
PAGE 572
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.4 FNC163 – TSUB / RTC Data Subtraction Cautions 1. Number of occupied devices Three devices are occupied by S1 , S2 and D respectively. Make sure that these devices are not used in other controls for the machine. 2.
PAGE 573
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21 FNC164 – HTOS / Hour to Second Conversion FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control 21.5 21.5 FNC164 – HTOS / Hour to Second Conversion Outline This instruction converts the time data in units of "hour, minute, and second" into data in units of "second".
PAGE 574
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.5 FNC164 – HTOS / Hour to Second Conversion 2. 32-bit operation (DHTOS and DHTOSP) The time data (hour, minute, and second) stored in "second", and stored to Command input S FNC164 DHTOS D +1, S hour S , S +1, and S +2 is converted into data in units of .
PAGE 575
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21 FNC165 – STOH / Second to Hour Conversion FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control 21.6 21.6 FNC165 – STOH / Second to Hour Conversion Outline This instruction converts the time data in units of "second" into data in units of "hour, minute, and second".
PAGE 576
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.6 FNC165 – STOH / Second to Hour Conversion 2. 32-bit operation (DSTOH and DSTOHP) The time data in units of "second" stored in second", and stored to three devices Command input S FNC165 DSTOH +1 S D S , +1 and +1, and D D +2 (hour, minute, and second).
PAGE 577
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21 FNC166 – TRD / Read RTC data FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control 21.7 21.7 FNC166 – TRD / Read RTC data Outline This instruction reads the clock data of the built-in PLC real time clock.
PAGE 578
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.8 21.8 FNC167 – TWR / Set RTC data FNC167 – TWR / Set RTC data Outline This instruction writes the clock data to the built-in PLC real time clock. 1. Instruction format FNC 167 P TWR Mnemonic 16-bit Instruction 3 steps Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Continuous Operation Pulse (Single) Operation TWR TWRP Operation Condition − 2.
PAGE 579
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.8 FNC167 – TWR / Set RTC data 21 FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control Caution 1. Number of occupied devices Seven devices are occupied by S . Make sure that these devices are not used in other controls for the machine. 22 FNC170-FNC179 External Device Program example 1.
PAGE 580
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.9 21.9 FNC169 – HOUR / Hour Meter FNC169 – HOUR / Hour Meter Outline This instruction measures the ON time of the input contact in units of hour. 1. Instruction format D FNC 169 HOUR Mnemonic 16-bit Instruction 7 steps Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Continuous Operation HOUR 13 steps Operation Condition Continuous Operation DHOUR 2.
PAGE 581
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.9 FNC169 – HOUR / Hour Meter 21 Command input [ S +1, FNC169 DHOUR S D1 D2 ] : Time after which D2 S +2 . ] : Current value in units of hour The high-order side is stored in D1 D1 +1, and the low-order side in S1 FNC170-FNC179 External Device +1, D1 22 is set to ON Specify the high-order side in S1 [ D1 FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control 2.
PAGE 582
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 22 External Device – FNC170 to FNC179 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 22. External Device – FNC170 to FNC179 FNC170 to FNC179 provide conversion instructions for gray codes used in absolute type rotary encoders and instructions dedicated to analog blocks. 580 FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 170 GRY GRY S D Decimal to Gray Code Conversion Section 22.1 171 GBIN GBIN S D Gray Code to Decimal Conversion Section 22.
PAGE 583
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 22 External Device – FNC170 to FNC179 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21 FNC170 – GRY / Decimal to Gray Code Conversion FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control 22.1 22.1 FNC170 – GRY / Decimal to Gray Code Conversion Outline 22 This instruction converts a binary value into a gray code, and transfers it.
PAGE 584
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 22 External Device – FNC170 to FNC179 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 22.2 22.2 FNC171 – GBIN / Gray Code to Decimal Conversion FNC171 – GBIN / Gray Code to Decimal Conversion Outline This instruction converts a gray code into a binary value, and transfers it. 1.
PAGE 585
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 22 External Device – FNC170 to FNC179 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21 FNC176 – RD3A / Read form Dedicated Analog Block FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control 22.3 22.3 FNC176 – RD3A / Read form Dedicated Analog Block Outline 22 This instruction reads an analog input value from the analog block FX0N-3A*1 or FX2N-2AD. FNC170-FNC179 External Device 1.
PAGE 586
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 22 External Device – FNC170 to FNC179 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 22.4 22.4 FNC177 – WR3A / Write to Dedicated Analog Block FNC177 – WR3A / Write to Dedicated Analog Block Outline This instruction writes a digital value to the analog block FX0N-3A*1 or FX2N-2DA. 1.
PAGE 587
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 23 Introduction of Alternate Instructions – FNC180 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 23.1 Instruction correspondence table 21 FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control 23.
PAGE 588
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24. Others – FNC181 to FNC189 FNC181 to FNC189 provide instructions for generating random numbers, executing CRC data operations, and processing data in high-speed counter operations. 586 FNC No. Mnemonic 181 – 182 COMRD 183 – 184 RND 185 – 186 DUTY 187 – 188 CRC 189 HCMOV Symbol Function Reference – COMRD S D Read device comment data Section 24.
PAGE 589
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21 FNC182 – COMRD / Read Device Comment Data FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control 24.1 24.1 FNC182 – COMRD / Read Device Comment Data Outline 1.
PAGE 590
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2) The final device of D 24.1 FNC182 – COMRD / Read Device Comment Data is as follows depending on the ON/OFF status of M8091. ON/OFF status Contents of processing M8091 = OFF When M8091 is OFF, "0000H" is written to in the device following the final character. M8091 = ON When M8091 is ON, the device following the final character does not change.
PAGE 591
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21 FNC184 – RND / Random Number Generation FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control 24.2 24.2 FNC184 – RND / Random Number Generation Outline 22 This instruction generates random numbers. FNC170-FNC179 External Device 1.
PAGE 592
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.3 24.3 FNC186 – DUTY / Timing Pulse Generation FNC186 – DUTY / Timing Pulse Generation Outline This instruction generates the timing signal whose one cycle corresponds to the specified number of operation cycles. 1.
PAGE 593
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.3 FNC186 – DUTY / Timing Pulse Generation 21 When the command input is set to ON, the operation is started. The timing clock output destination device D is set to ON or OFF by the END instruction. Even if the command input is set to OFF, the operation is not stopped. In the STOP mode, the operation is suspended. When the power to the PLC is turned OFF, the operation is stopped.
PAGE 594
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.4 24.4 FNC188 – CRC / Cyclic Redundancy Check FNC188 – CRC / Cyclic Redundancy Check Outline This CRC instruction calculates the CRC (cyclic redundancy check) value which is an error check method used in communication. In addition to CRC value, there are other error check methods such as parity check and sum check.
PAGE 595
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.4 FNC188 – CRC / Cyclic Redundancy Check 21 in S . The operation result is stored to one 16-bit device specified in D .
PAGE 596
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.4 FNC188 – CRC / Cyclic Redundancy Check 2. Related device Related device Description M8161*1 *1. ON CRC instruction operates in the 8-bit mode. OFF CRC instruction operates in the 16-bit mode. Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from RUN to STOP. Caution In this instruction, “X16 + X15 + X2 + 1” is used as a polynomial for generating the CRC value (CRC-16).
PAGE 597
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.4 FNC188 – CRC / Cyclic Redundancy Check 21 In the program example shown below, the CRC value of the ASCII code “0123456” stored in D100 to D106 is generated and stored to D0 when M0 turns ON. 1.
PAGE 598
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.5 24.5 FNC189 – HCMOV / High-Speed Counter Move FNC189 – HCMOV / High-Speed Counter Move Outline This instruction updates the current value of a specified high-speed counter or ring counter. The function of this instruction varies depending on the PLC version. 1.
PAGE 599
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.5 FNC189 – HCMOV / High-Speed Counter Move 21 1) Current value update timing Hardware counter When OUT instruction for the counter is executed Software counter Every time a pulse is input By using DHCMOV instruction, the current value can be updated and transferred when it is executed.
PAGE 600
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3) 24.5 FNC189 – HCMOV / High-Speed Counter Move If two or more DHCMOV instructions are used in one input interrupt program, only the first instruction (just after the interrupt pointer) is executed when the interrupt is generated. The rest of the interrupt, including additional DHCMOV instructions, is executed according to normal interrupt processing.
PAGE 601
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.5 FNC189 – HCMOV / High-Speed Counter Move 21 1. Program example 1 In the program example below, the current value of the high-speed counter C235 is compared in each operation cycle, and then the output Y000 is set to ON if the current value is "K500" or more (when the current value of C235 is not cleared).
PAGE 602
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25. Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199 FNC190 to FNC199 provide instructions for adding, subtracting and comparing block data. 600 FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 190 – – 191 – – 192 BK+ BK+ S1 S2 D n Block Data Addition Section 25.1 193 BK– BK- S1 S2 D n Block Data Subtraction Section 25.
PAGE 603
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21 FNC192 – BK+ / Block Data Addition FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control 25.1 25.1 FNC192 – BK+ / Block Data Addition Outline 22 This instruction adds binary block data.
PAGE 604
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25.1 FNC192 – BK+ / Block Data Addition 2.
PAGE 605
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25.1 FNC192 – BK+ / Block Data Addition 21 An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is stored in D8067.
PAGE 606
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25.2 25.2 NFC193 – BK– / Block Data Subtraction NFC193 – BK– / Block Data Subtraction Outline This instruction subtracts binary block data. 1.
PAGE 607
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25.
PAGE 608
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25.2 NFC193 – BK– / Block Data Subtraction Errors An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is stored in D8067.
PAGE 609
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21 FNC194~199 – BKCMP=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Block Data Compare FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control 25.3 25.3 FNC194~199 – BKCMP=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Block Data Compare Outline 22 These instructions compare block data in the comparison condition set in each instruction.
PAGE 610
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25.3 FNC194~199 – BKCMP=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Block Data Compare Explanation of function and operation 1.
PAGE 611
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25.
PAGE 612
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25.3 FNC194~199 – BKCMP=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Block Data Compare Caution • When using 32-bit counters (including 32-bit high-speed counters) For comparing 32-bit counters and 32-bit high-speed counters (C200 to C255), make sure to use an instruction for 32-bit operation (DBKCMP=, DBKCMP>, DBKCMP<, DBKCMP<>, DBKCMP<=, or DBKCMP>=).
PAGE 613
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21 FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control 26. Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Symbol Function 200 STR STR S1 S2 D 201 VAL VAL S D1 D2 202 $+ $+ S1 S2 D 203 LEN 204 RIGHT 205 LEN S D Reference BIN to Character String Conversion Section 26.1 Character String to BIN Conversion Section 26.2 Link Character Strings Section 26.
PAGE 614
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.1 26.1 FNC200 – STR / BIN to Character String Conversion FNC200 – STR / BIN to Character String Conversion Outline This instruction converts binary data into character strings (ASCII codes). On the other hand, the ESTR (FNC116) instruction converts floating point data into character strings. → For character strings, refer to Section 5.3.
PAGE 615
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.1 FNC200 – STR / BIN to Character String Conversion 21 1.
PAGE 616
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.1 FNC200 – STR / BIN to Character String Conversion - When the number of all digits stored in S1 excluding the sign and decimal point is larger than the number of digits of 16-bit binary data stored in S2 , "space" (20H) is stored in each digit between the sign and the numeric value.
PAGE 617
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.1 FNC200 – STR / BIN to Character String Conversion 21 Converted character string data is stored in D and later as shown below.
PAGE 618
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.1 FNC200 – STR / BIN to Character String Conversion Program example In the program below, the 16-bit binary data stored in D10 is converted into a character string in accordance with the digit specification by D0 and D1 when X000 is set to ON, and then stored in D20 to D23. X000 FNC200 STRP FNC 12 MOVP K12672 D10 Data to be converted is set.
PAGE 619
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21 FNC201 – VAL / Character String to BIN Conversion FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control 26.2 26.2 FNC201 – VAL / Character String to BIN Conversion Outline 1.
PAGE 620
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.2 FNC201 – VAL / Character String to BIN Conversion For example, when a character string "-123.45" is specified in and D2 D1 S and later, the conversion result is stored in as shown below.
PAGE 621
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.2 FNC201 – VAL / Character String to BIN Conversion 21 1) A character string stored in and later is converted into 32-bit binary data. The number of all digits of the S binary data acquired for conversion is stored in +1, and the binary data is stored in [ D2 D1 D1 , the number of digits of the decimal part is stored in +1, D2 ].
PAGE 622
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5) 26.2 FNC201 – VAL / Character String to BIN Conversion [ D2 +1, D2 ] stores 16-bit data (bin) converted from a character string with the decimal point ignored. For the character string located in S and later, the "space" (20H) and "0" (30H) characters between the sign and the first number other than "0" are ignored in the conversion to 32-bit binary data.
PAGE 623
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.2 FNC201 – VAL / Character String to BIN Conversion 21 1) In the program below, the character string data stored in D20 to D22 is regarded as an integer value, converted into a binary value, and stored in D0 when X000 is set to ON. X000 FNC201 VALP D20 D10 D0 22 FNC170-FNC179 External Device END b15 b8 b7 31H(1) 2EH(.
PAGE 624
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.3 26.3 FNC202 – $+ / Link Character Strings FNC202 – $+ / Link Character Strings Outline This instruction links a character string to another character string. → For handling of character strings, refer to Section 5.3. 1.
PAGE 625
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.3 FNC202 – $+ / Link Character Strings 21 • When directly specifying a character string, up to 32 characters can be specified (input). However, this limitation in the number of characters is not applied when a word device is specified in S1 S2 or .
PAGE 626
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.4 26.4 FNC203 – LEN / Character String Length Detection FNC203 – LEN / Character String Length Detection Outline This instruction detects the number of characters (bytes) of a specified character string. → For handling of character strings, refer to Section 5.3. 1.
PAGE 627
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.4 FNC203 – LEN / Character String Length Detection 21 • This instruction can handle character codes other than ASCII codes, but the character string length is handled in byte units (8 bits). Accordingly, in the case of character codes in which 2 bytes express 1 character such as shift JIS codes, the length of 1 character is detected as “2”.
PAGE 628
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.5 26.5 FNC204 – RIGHT / Extracting Character String Data from the Right FNC204 – RIGHT / Extracting Character String Data from the Right Outline This instruction extracts a specified number of characters from the right end of a specified character string. → For handling of character strings, refer to Section 5.3. 1.
PAGE 629
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.
PAGE 630
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.6 26.6 FNC205 – LEFT / Extracting Character String Data from the Left FNC205 – LEFT / Extracting Character String Data from the Left Outline This instruction extracts a specified number of characters from the left end of a specified character string. → For handling of character strings, refer to Section 5.3. 1.
PAGE 631
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.
PAGE 632
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.7 26.7 FNC206 – MIDR / Random Selection of Character Strings FNC206 – MIDR / Random Selection of Character Strings Outline This instruction extracts a specified number of characters from arbitrary positions of a specified character string. → For handling of character strings, refer to Section 5.3. 1.
PAGE 633
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.7 FNC206 – MIDR / Random Selection of Character Strings 21 1. 16-bit operation (MIDR and MIDRP) " S2 +1" characters are extracted leftward from the position specified by S2 of the character string data stored - When the number of extracted characters specified by S2 a device storing the last character.
PAGE 634
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.7 FNC206 – MIDR / Random Selection of Character Strings Errors An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is stored in D8067.
PAGE 635
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21 FNC207 – MIDW / Random Replacement of Character Strings FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control 26.8 26.8 FNC207 – MIDW / Random Replacement of Character Strings Outline 1.
PAGE 636
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.8 FNC207 – MIDW / Random Replacement of Character Strings • The character string stored in S1 and later or D and later indicates data stored in devices from the specified device until “00H” is first detected in byte units. • When the number of characters to be overwritten specified by S2 executed.
PAGE 637
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.8 FNC207 – MIDW / Random Replacement of Character Strings 21 This instruction can handle character codes other than ASCII codes, but please note the following: • The number of characters is handled in byte units (8 bits).
PAGE 638
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.9 26.9 FNC208 – INSTR / Character string search FNC208 – INSTR / Character string search Outline This instruction searches a specified character string within another character string. 1.
PAGE 639
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.9 FNC208 – INSTR / Character string search 21 A character string can be directly specified in the character string S1 S2 Character string S1 "AB" D100 22 5 FNC170-FNC179 External Device Character string to be searched S2 b15 b8 b7 b0 +0 32H(2) 31H(1) Search is started from +1 34H(4) 33H(3) the 3rd character (n = 3).
PAGE 640
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.10 FNC209 – $MOV / Character String Transfer 26.10 FNC209 – $MOV / Character String Transfer Outline This instruction transfers character string data. → For handling of character strings, refer to Section 5.3. 1.
PAGE 641
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.10 FNC209 – $MOV / Character String Transfer 21 32H(2) 31H(1) D10 32H(2) 31H(1) b0 ... It is the same as the D11 34H(4) 33H(3) D11 32H(2) 31H(1) character string before transfer.
PAGE 642
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27. Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219 FNC210 to FNC219 provide instructions for reading last-in data and controlling leftward/rightward shift instructions with carry. 640 FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 210 FDEL FDEL S D n Deleting Data from Tables Section 27.1 211 FINS FINS S D n Inserting Data to Tables Section 27.
PAGE 643
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21 FNC210 – FDEL / Deleting Data from Tables FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control 27.1 27.1 FNC210 – FDEL / Deleting Data from Tables Outline 22 This instruction deletes an arbitrary data value from a data table. FNC170-FNC179 External Device 1.
PAGE 644
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.1 FNC210 – FDEL / Deleting Data from Tables Errors An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is stored in D8067.
PAGE 645
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21 FNC211 – FINS / Inserting Data to Tables FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control 27.2 27.2 FNC211 – FINS / Inserting Data to Tables Outline 22 This instruction inserts a data value into an arbitrary position in a data table. FNC170-FNC179 External Device 1.
PAGE 646
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.2 FNC211 – FINS / Inserting Data to Tables Errors An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is stored in D8067.
PAGE 647
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21 FNC212 – POP / Shift Last Data Read [FILO Control] FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control 27.3 27.3 FNC212 – POP / Shift Last Data Read [FILO Control] Outline 1.
PAGE 648
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.3 FNC212 – POP / Shift Last Data Read [FILO Control] • Subtract “1” from the value of the pointer data S . Data area +n-1 S S +n-2 S +6 S +5 Pointer S +4 S +3 S +2 S +1 S In the case of K4 No data area +n-1 S S +n-2 S +6 S +5 Pointer S +4 S +3 S +2 S +1 S D K4→K3 Related device → For the zero flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.
PAGE 649
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.3 FNC212 – POP / Shift Last Data Read [FILO Control] 21 Among values stored in D20 input first to D101 to D106, the last value input is stored to D10, and “1” is subtracted from the number of stored data (pointer D100) every time X000 turns ON.
PAGE 650
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.4 27.4 FNC213 – SFR / Bit Shift Right with Carry FNC213 – SFR / Bit Shift Right with Carry Outline This instruction shifts 16 bits stored in a word device rightward by “n” bits. 1.
PAGE 651
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.
PAGE 652
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.5 27.5 FNC214 – SFL / Bit Shift Left with Carry FNC214 – SFL / Bit Shift Left with Carry Outline This instruction shifts 16 bits stored in a word device leftward by “n” bits. 1.
PAGE 653
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.5 FNC214 – SFL / Bit Shift Left with Carry 21 Command input FNC214 SFL K2M10 1 22 M14M13 1 0 0 1 M10 1 1 23 M17 1 0 FNC180 Alternate Instructions Carry flag M8022 K3 FNC170-FNC179 External Device M17 0 0 FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control When a bit device is specified by digit specification 4 K bits are shifted according to the data of bit specification.
PAGE 654
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 28 Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 28. Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249 FNC220 to FNC249 provide data comparison instructions which can be handled as contact symbols in programming such as LD, AND and OR. 652 FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 220 − − 221 − − 222 − − 223 − − 224 LD= LD= S1 S2 Load Compare S1 = S2 Section 28.
PAGE 655
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 28 Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21 Mnemonic 239 − 240 OR= OR= S1 S2 OR> S1 S2 OR> Function Reference − 22 OR Compare S1 = S2 Section 28.3 OR Compare S1 > S2 Section 28.3 OR Compare S1 < S2 Section 28.3 FNC170-FNC179 External Device 241 Symbol FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control FNC No.
PAGE 656
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 28 Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 28.1 28.1 FNC224~230 – LD =, >, <, <>, <=, >= / Data Comparison FNC224~230 – LD =, >, <, <>, <=, >= / Data Comparison Outline These instructions compare numeric values, and set a contact to ON when the condition agrees so that an operation is started. 1.
PAGE 657
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 28 Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 28.1 FNC224~230 – LD =, >, <, <>, <=, >= / Data Comparison 21 FNC224 to FNC230 are data comparison instructions connected to bus lines. The contents of S1 are compared with the contents of S2 in binary format, and a contact becomes conductive (ON) or non-conductive (OFF) depending on the comparison result.
PAGE 658
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 28 Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 28.2 28.2 FNC232~238 – AND=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Data Comparison FNC232~238 – AND=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Data Comparison Outline These instructions compare numeric values, and set a contact to ON when the condition agrees. 1.
PAGE 659
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 28 Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 28.2 FNC232~238 – AND=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Data Comparison 21 FNC232 to FNC237 are data comparison instructions connected to other contacts in series. The contents of S1 are compared with the contents of S2 in binary format, and a contact becomes conductive (ON) or non-conductive (OFF) depending on the comparison result.
PAGE 660
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 28 Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 28.3 28.3 FNC240~246 – OR=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Data Comparison FNC240~246 – OR=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Data Comparison Outline These instructions compare numeric values, and set a contact to ON when the condition agrees. 1.
PAGE 661
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 28 Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 28.3 FNC240~246 – OR=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Data Comparison 21 FNC240 to 246 are data comparison instructions connected to other contacts in parallel. The contents of S1 are compared with the contents of S2 in binary format, and a contact becomes conductive (ON) or non-conductive (OFF) depending on the comparison result.
PAGE 662
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29. Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 660 FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol 250 − − 251 − − 252 − − 253 − − 254 − − 255 − − 256 LIMIT LIMIT S1 S2 S3 D Limit Control Section 29.1 257 BAND BAND S1 S2 S3 D Dead Band Control Section 29.2 258 ZONE ZONE S1 S2 S3 D Zone Control Section 29.
PAGE 663
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21 FNC256 – LIMIT / Limit Control FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control 29.1 29.1 FNC256 – LIMIT / Limit Control Outline 1.
PAGE 664
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.1 FNC256 – LIMIT / Limit Control • When controlling the output value using only the lower limit value, set “32767” to the upper limit value specified in S2 . 2.
PAGE 665
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.1 FNC256 – LIMIT / Limit Control 21 1. Program example 1 In the program example shown below, the BCD data set in X020 to X037 is controlled by the limit values “500” to “5000”, and the controlled value is output to D1 when X000 turns ON.
PAGE 666
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.2 29.2 FNC257 – BAND / Dead Band Control FNC257 – BAND / Dead Band Control Outline This instruction provides the upper limit value and lower limit value of the dead band for an input numeric value, and controls the output value using these limit values. 1.
PAGE 667
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.2 FNC257 – BAND / Dead Band Control 21 Depending on how the input value (32-bit binary value) specified by [ S3 range between [ S1 +1, S1 ] and [ S2 +1, S2 The output value is controlled as shown below: Command input ] compares to the dead band D ] is controlled. S3 S2 D S3 +1, S3 S3 +1, S3 +1, S1 In the case of “Lower limit value > Input value” ...............
PAGE 668
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.2 FNC257 – BAND / Dead Band Control Program examples 1. Program example 1 In the program example shown below, the BCD data set in X020 to X037 is controlled by the dead band from “-1000” to “+1000”, and a controlled value is output to D1 when X000 turns ON.
PAGE 669
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21 FNC258 – ZONE / Zone Control FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control 29.3 29.3 FNC258 – ZONE / Zone Control Outline 1. Instruction format FNC 258 D ZONE P 16-bit Instruction 9 steps Mnemonic Operation Condition ZONE ZONEP 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic 17 steps Operation Condition DZONE DZONEP Continuous Operation Pulse (Single) Operation 2.
PAGE 670
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.3 FNC258 – ZONE / Zone Control 2. 32-bit operation (DZONE and DZONEP) The bias value specified by [ S1 +1, S1 ] or [ S2 S3 ], and output to the device specified by [ D The bias value is added as shown below: Command input FNC258 DZONE S3 S1 S2 +1, S2 +1, S3 +1, S3 +1, D S3 +1, S3 In the case of “Input value < 0” ..................................
PAGE 671
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.3 FNC258 – ZONE / Zone Control 21 1. Program example 1 In the program example shown below, the BCD data set in X020 to X037 is controlled by the zone from “-1000” to “+1000”, and the controlled value is output to D1 when X000 turns ON.
PAGE 672
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.4 29.4 FNC259 – SCL / Scaling (Coordinate by Point Data) FNC259 – SCL / Scaling (Coordinate by Point Data) Outline This instruction executes scaling of the input value using a specified data table, and outputs the result. SCL2 (FNC269) is also available with a different data table configuration for scaling. → For SCL2 (FNC269) instruction, refer to Section 29.7. 1.
PAGE 673
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.4 FNC259 – SCL / Scaling (Coordinate by Point Data) 21 The input value specified in [ S1 +1, S1 ] is processed by scaling for the specified conversion characteristics, and stored to a device number specified in [ D +1, D ]. Conversion for scaling is executed based on the data table stored in a device specified in [ S2 +1, S2 ] and later.
PAGE 674
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.
PAGE 675
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.4 FNC259 – SCL / Scaling (Coordinate by Point Data) 21 In the program example shown below, the value input to D0 is processed by scaling based on the conversion table for scaling set in R0 and later, and output to D10.
PAGE 676
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.5 29.5 FNC260 – DABIN / Decimal ASCII to BIN Conversion FNC260 – DABIN / Decimal ASCII to BIN Conversion Outline This instruction converts numeric data expressed in decimal ASCII codes (30H to 39H) into binary data. 1.
PAGE 677
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.
PAGE 678
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 29.5 FNC260 – DABIN / Decimal ASCII to BIN Conversion Program example In the program below, the sign and decimal ASCII codes in five digits stored in D20 to D22 are converted into a binary value and stored in D0 when X000 is set to ON.
PAGE 679
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21 FNC261 – BINDA / BIN to Decimal ASCII Conversion FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control 29.6 29.6 FNC261 – BINDA / BIN to Decimal ASCII Conversion Outline 22 This instruction converts binary data into decimal ASCII codes (30H to 39H). FNC170-FNC179 External Device 1.
PAGE 680
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.6 FNC261 – BINDA / BIN to Decimal ASCII Conversion b) "20H (space)" is stored for "0" on the left side of the effective digits (zero suppression). 00 325 Effective digits 20H c) D +3 is set as follows depending on the ON/OFF status of M8091. ON/OFF status Contents of processing M8091=OFF D +3 is set to "0000H (NULL)". M8091=ON D +3 does not change. 2.
PAGE 681
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.6 FNC261 – BINDA / BIN to Decimal ASCII Conversion 21 Device Name Description • For 16-bit operation - Output character quantity selector signal M8091 FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control Related devices • When M8091 is OFF, - When M8091 is ON, For 32-bit operation +3 is set to "0000H (NULL)". D D +3 does not change.
PAGE 682
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.7 29.7 FNC269 – SCL2 / Scaling 2 (Coordinate by X/Y Data) FNC269 – SCL2 / Scaling 2 (Coordinate by X/Y Data) Outline This instruction executes scaling of the input value using a specified data table, and outputs the result. SCL (FNC259) is also available with a different data table configuration for scaling. SCL2 instruction is supported in the FX3UC Series Ver. 1.
PAGE 683
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.7 FNC269 – SCL2 / Scaling 2 (Coordinate by X/Y Data) 21 The input value specified in [ S1 +1, ] is processed by scaling for the specified conversion characteristics, S1 and stored to a device number specified in [ D +1, D ]. Conversion for scaling is executed based on the data table stored in a device specified in [ S2 +1, S2 ] and later.
PAGE 684
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.
PAGE 685
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.7 FNC269 – SCL2 / Scaling 2 (Coordinate by X/Y Data) 21 In the program example shown below, the value input to D0 is processed by scaling based on the conversion table for scaling set in R0 and later, and output to D10.
PAGE 686
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 30 External Device Communication – FNC270 to FNC276 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30. External Device Communication – FNC270 to FNC276 FNC270 to FNC276 provide instructions for executing inverter communication and MODBUS communication. 684 FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 270 IVCK IVCK S1 S2 D n Inverter Status Check Section 30.1 271 IVDR IVDR S1 S2 S3 n Inverter Drive Section 30.
PAGE 687
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 30 External Device Communication – FNC270 to FNC276 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21 FNC270 – IVCK / Inverter Status Check FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control 30.1 30.1 FNC270 – IVCK / Inverter Status Check Outline 1. Instruction format Mnemonic 16-bit Instruction 9 steps Operation Condition IVCK 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Continuous Operation ⎯ 23 Operation Condition ⎯ ⎯ FNC180 Alternate Instructions FNC 270 IVCK 2.
PAGE 688
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 30 External Device Communication – FNC270 to FNC276 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.1 FNC270 – IVCK / Inverter Status Check 2. Inverter instruction codes The table below shows inverter instruction codes which can be specified in S2 . Only use the instruction codes shown below. Use of instruction codes not shown below may cause communication errors. Do not use instruction codes not shown in the table below. They may cause communication errors.
PAGE 689
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 30 External Device Communication – FNC270 to FNC276 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21 FNC271 – IVDR / Inverter Drive FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control 30.2 30.2 FNC271 – IVDR / Inverter Drive Outline 1. Instruction format 16-bit Instruction 9 steps Mnemonic Operation Condition IVDR 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Continuous Operation ⎯ 23 Operation Condition ⎯ ⎯ FNC180 Alternate Instructions FNC 271 IVDR 2.
PAGE 690
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 30 External Device Communication – FNC270 to FNC276 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.2 FNC271 – IVDR / Inverter Drive 2. Inverter instruction codes The table below shows inverter instruction codes which can be specified in S2 . For instruction codes, refer to the pages explaining computer link in detail in each inverter manual.
PAGE 691
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 30 External Device Communication – FNC270 to FNC276 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21 FNC272 – IVRD / Inverter Parameter Read FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control 30.3 30.3 FNC272 – IVRD / Inverter Parameter Read Outline 1. Instruction format FNC 272 IVRD Mnemonic 16-bit Instruction Operation Condition IVRD 9 steps 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Continuous Operation 23 ⎯ ⎯ FNC180 Alternate Instructions ⎯ Operation Condition 2.
PAGE 692
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 30 External Device Communication – FNC270 to FNC276 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.3 FNC272 – IVRD / Inverter Parameter Read 2. Related devices → For the instruction execution complete flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
PAGE 693
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 30 External Device Communication – FNC270 to FNC276 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21 FNC273 – IVWR / Inverter Parameter Write FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control 30.4 30.4 FNC273 – IVWR / Inverter Parameter Write Outline 1.
PAGE 694
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 30 External Device Communication – FNC270 to FNC276 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.4 FNC273 – IVWR / Inverter Parameter Write 2. Related devices → For the instruction execution complete flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
PAGE 695
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 30 External Device Communication – FNC270 to FNC276 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21 FNC274 – IVBWR / Inverter Parameter Block Write FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control 30.5 30.5 FNC274 – IVBWR / Inverter Parameter Block Write Outline 1.
PAGE 696
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 30 External Device Communication – FNC270 to FNC276 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.5 FNC274 – IVBWR / Inverter Parameter Block Write 2. Related devices → For the instruction execution complete flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
PAGE 697
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 30 External Device Communication – FNC270 to FNC276 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21 FNC275 – IVMC / Inverter Multi Command FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control 30.6 30.6 FNC275 – IVMC / Inverter Multi Command Outline 1. Instruction format 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 2.
PAGE 698
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 30 External Device Communication – FNC270 to FNC276 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.6 FNC275 – IVMC / Inverter Multi Command 3. Related devices → For the instruction execution complete flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
PAGE 699
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 30 External Device Communication – FNC270 to FNC276 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21 FNC276 - MODBUS Read/Write Instruction FNC160-FNC169 Real Time Clock Control 30.7 30.7 FNC276 - MODBUS Read/Write Instruction 22 Outline → For explanation of the instruction, refer to the MODBUS Communication Edition. 1.
PAGE 700
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 30 External Device Communication – FNC270 to FNC276 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.7 FNC276 - MODBUS Read/Write Instruction 30.7.1 Command Code and Command Parameters The following table shows the required command parameters for each command code.
PAGE 701
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 30 External Device Communication – FNC270 to FNC276 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.
PAGE 702
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 30 External Device Communication – FNC270 to FNC276 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition S1 11H Report Slave ID (Available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.) 16H Mask Write Register (Available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.) 30.
PAGE 703
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 31 Data Transfer 3 – FNC277 to FNC279 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31 FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 31. Data Transfer 3 – FNC277 to FNC279 FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 277 – 278 RBFM RBFM m1 m2 D n1 n2 Divided BFM Read Section 31.1 279 WBFM WBFM m1 m2 S n1 n2 Divided BFM Write Section 31.
PAGE 704
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 31 Data Transfer 3 – FNC277 to FNC279 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31.1 31.1 FNC278 – RBFM / Divided BFM Read FNC278 – RBFM / Divided BFM Read Outline This instruction reads data from continuous buffer memories (BFM) in a special function unit/block over several operation cycles by the time division method. This instruction is convenient for reading receive data, etc.
PAGE 705
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 31 Data Transfer 3 – FNC277 to FNC279 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31.1 FNC278 – RBFM / Divided BFM Read 31 → For the flag use methods for instruction execution complete and instruction execution abnormally complete, refer to Subsection 6.5.2. Device Name Description Instruction execution complete Turns ON when an instruction is finished normally.
PAGE 706
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 31 Data Transfer 3 – FNC277 to FNC279 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31.1 FNC278 – RBFM / Divided BFM Read Cautions • A watchdog timer error may occur when many numbers of points are transferred in one operation cycle. In such a case, take one of the following countermeasures: - Change the watchdog timer time By overwriting the contents of D8000 (watchdog timer time), the watchdog timer detection time is changed (initial value: K200).
PAGE 707
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 31 Data Transfer 3 – FNC277 to FNC279 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31.1 FNC278 – RBFM / Divided BFM Read 31 In the example shown below, data is read from and written to the buffer memories (BFM) in the unit No. 2 as follows: • When X000 is set to ON, data stored in D100 to D179 (80 points) are written to the buffer memories (BFM) #1001 to 1080 in the special function unit/block whose unit number is No. 2 by 16 points in each operation cycle.
PAGE 708
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 31 Data Transfer 3 – FNC277 to FNC279 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31.2 31.2 FNC279 – WBFM / Divided BFM Write FNC279 – WBFM / Divided BFM Write Outline This instruction writes data to continuous buffer memories (BFM) in a special function unit/block over several operation cycles by the time division method. This instruction is convenient for writing send data, etc.
PAGE 709
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 31 Data Transfer 3 – FNC277 to FNC279 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31.2 FNC279 – WBFM / Divided BFM Write 31 → For the flag use methods for instruction execution complete and instruction execution abnormally complete, refer to Subsection 6.5.2. Device Name Description Instruction execution complete Turns ON when an instruction is finished normally.
PAGE 710
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 32 High-Speed Processing 2 – FNC280 to FNC289 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 32. High-Speed Processing 2 – FNC280 to FNC289 708 FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol 280 HSCT 281 − − 282 − − 283 − − 284 − − 285 − − 286 − − 287 − − 288 − − 289 − − HSCT S1 m S2 D n Function Reference High-Speed Counter Compare With Data Table Section 32.
PAGE 711
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 32 High-Speed Processing 2 – FNC280 to FNC289 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31 FNC280 – HSCT / High-Speed Counter Compare With Data Table FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 32.1 32.1 FNC280 – HSCT / High-Speed Counter Compare With Data Table Outline 1.
PAGE 712
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 32 High-Speed Processing 2 – FNC280 to FNC289 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 32.
PAGE 713
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 32 High-Speed Processing 2 – FNC280 to FNC289 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 32.
PAGE 714
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 32 High-Speed Processing 2 – FNC280 to FNC289 32.1 FNC280 – HSCT / High-Speed Counter Compare With Data Table Cautions • This instruction can be executed only once in a program. If this instruction is programmed two or more times, an operation error is caused by the second instruction and later, and the instruction will not be executed.
PAGE 715
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 32 High-Speed Processing 2 – FNC280 to FNC289 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 32.1 FNC280 – HSCT / High-Speed Counter Compare With Data Table 31 In the program shown below, the current value of C235 (counting X000) is compared with the comparison data table set in R0 and later, and a specified pattern is output to Y010 to Y013. M8000 M8235 C235 is used as an up counter.
PAGE 716
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33. Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 714 FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function 290 LOADR 291 SAVER 292 INITR 293 LOGR 294 RWER 295 INITER 296 − − 297 − − 298 − − 299 − − LOADR S n SAVER S m D INITR S n LOGR S m D1 n D2 RWER S n INITER S n Reference Load From ER Section 33.1 Save to ER Section 33.
PAGE 717
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31 FNC290 – LOADR / Load From ER FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 33.1 33.1 FNC290 – LOADR / Load From ER Outline 1.
PAGE 718
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2) 33.1 FNC290 – LOADR / Load From ER In FX3G/FX3GC PLCs a) When a memory cassette is connected (A memory cassette can be connected only to FX3G PLC.
PAGE 719
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.1 FNC290 – LOADR / Load From ER 31 1. Allowable number of writes to the memory Note the following cautions on access to extension file registers. Errors • When the last device number to be transferred exceeds “32767” (error code: K6706) At this time, devices up to R32767 are read and transferred.
PAGE 720
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.2 33.2 FNC291 – SAVER / Save to ER FNC291 – SAVER / Save to ER Outline This instruction writes the current values of the extension registers (R) stored in the PLC's built-in RAM to extension file registers (ER) stored in a memory cassette (flash memory) in sector units (2048 points). The RWER (FNC294) instruction provided in FX3UC PLC Ver. 1.
PAGE 721
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.
PAGE 722
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.2 FNC291 – SAVER / Save to ER 2. Initialization of extension file registers Execute the INITER (FNC295) or INITR (FNC292) instruction to target extension file registers (ER) before executing the SAVER instruction.
PAGE 723
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.2 FNC291 – SAVER / Save to ER 31 An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is stored in D8067.
PAGE 724
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.2 FNC291 – SAVER / Save to ER Program examples 1) In the case of FX3U PLC Ver. 2.20 or later and FX3UC PLC Ver. 1.30 or later In the example shown below, only extension registers R10 to R19 (in sector 0) need to be updated in the extension file registers (ER).
PAGE 725
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.2 FNC291 – SAVER / Save to ER 31 Setting backup data Extension file registers Number of (ER) Extension registers (R) Current value Device number Current value R0 K100 ER0 K100 R1 K105 ER1 K105 . . R10 . . K200 . . . . R11 K215 Changed data Setting data K400 . . . . . ER12 K400 . . ER19 . . K350 . . . . 33 ER100 HFFFF . . . .
PAGE 726
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2) 33.2 FNC291 – SAVER / Save to ER In the case of FX3UC PLC before Ver. 1.30 In the example shown below, only extension registers R10 to R19 (in sector 0) need to be updated in the extension file registers (ER). When X000 is set to ON, sector 0 (head device R0) is written to the extension file registers 128 points at a time.
PAGE 727
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.2 FNC291 – SAVER / Save to ER 31 Setting backup data Setting data Extension file registers Extension registers (R) (ER) Current Device number value Device number Current value Device number Current value ER0 HFFFF R0 K100 R1 HFFFF ER1 HFFFF R1 K105 . . . . . .
PAGE 728
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.3 33.3 FNC292 – INITR / Initialize R and ER FNC292 – INITR / Initialize R and ER Outline This instruction initializes extension registers (R) to “HFFFF” () in the RAM built into the PLC and extension file registers in a memory cassette (flash memory) before data logging using the LOGR (FNC293) instruction. In FX3UC PLC before Ver. 1.
PAGE 729
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.
PAGE 730
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.3 FNC292 – INITR / Initialize R and ER • Setting the WDT (FNC 07) instruction just before and after the INITR instruction as shown below: Command input FNC 07 WDT FNC292 INITR The watchdog timer is reset. n S FNC 07 WDT The watchdog timer is reset.
PAGE 731
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31 FNC293 – LOGR / Logging R and ER FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 33.4 33.4 FNC293 – LOGR / Logging R and ER Outline This instruction logs specified devices, and stores the logged data to extension registers (R) in the RAM and extension file registers (ER) in a memory cassette. FNC280-FNC289 High-Speed Processing 2 1.
PAGE 732
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.4 FNC293 – LOGR / Logging R and ER Logging data format D1 to D1 +m-1 D1 +m to D1 +2m-1 D1 +2m to D1 Number of stored data Destination storing 1st logging data S to S +m-1 → D1 =m Destination storing 2nd logging data S to S +m-1 → D1 = 2m Destination storing 3rd logging data → D1 = 3m +3m-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...
PAGE 733
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.4 FNC293 – LOGR / Logging R and ER 31 Flash memory is adopted in a memory cassette. Make sure to initialize the data storage area in sector units before starting logging. If the LOGR instruction is executed without initializing the data storage area, an operation error (error code: K6770) may be caused.
PAGE 734
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.4 FNC293 – LOGR / Logging R and ER 5) To the PLC, write the data which was temporarily withdrawn to GX Works2. [1] Select “Online” → “Write to PLC...” to display the Online Data Operation dialog box. [2] Click "PLC Parameter/Network Parameter" and "MAIN" to check mark each of them. [3] Click [Execute] button to execute writing.
PAGE 735
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31 FNC294 – RWER / Rewrite to ER FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 33.5 33.5 FNC294 – RWER / Rewrite to ER Outline 1.
PAGE 736
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2) 33.5 FNC294 – RWER / Rewrite to ER In FX3G/FX3GC PLCs a) When a memory cassette is connected (A memory cassette can be connected only to FX3G PLC.) The contents (current values) of “n” extension registers (R) starting from are written (transferred) to extension file registers having with same device numbers in a memory cassette (flash memory).
PAGE 737
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.5 FNC294 – RWER / Rewrite to ER 31 1. Cautions on writing data to a memory cassette (flash memory) for FX3U/FX3UC PLCs Memory cassettes use flash memory. Note the following contents when writing data to extension file registers in a memory cassette with the RWER (FNC294) instruction.
PAGE 738
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.5 FNC294 – RWER / Rewrite to ER 3. Allowable number of writes to the memory Note the following cautions on access to extension file registers. • In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs Data can be written to the memory cassette (flash memory) up to 10,000 times.
PAGE 739
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.5 FNC294 – RWER / Rewrite to ER 31 An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is stored in D8067. • When the last device number to be transferred exceeds “32767*1” (error code: K6706) At this time, data is read (and transferred) until the last device number R32767*1.
PAGE 740
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.6 33.6 FNC295 – INITER / Initialize ER FNC295 – INITER / Initialize ER Outline This instruction initializes extension file registers (ER) to “HFFFF” () in a memory cassette (flash memory) before executing the SAVER (FNC291) instruction. Because the INITER (FNC295) instruction is not supported in FX3UC PLC earlier than Ver. 1.
PAGE 741
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.6 FNC295 – INITER / Initialize ER 31 FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 Operation • Extension file registers (ER) [inside the memory cassette] Current value S HFFFF 32 S +1 H5678 HFFFF S +2 H90AB HFFFF ... H1234 ... After execution ...
PAGE 742
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.6 FNC295 – INITER / Initialize ER Errors An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is stored in D8067.
PAGE 743
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 34 FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31 FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 34. FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 32 300 FLCRT FLCRT S1 S2 S3 n 301 FLDEL FLDEL S1 S2 n 302 FLWR 303 FLRD 304 FLCMD FLCMD S n 305 FLSTRD FLSTRD S D n Function Reference File create / check Section 34.1 File delete / CF card format Section 34.
PAGE 744
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 34 FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 34.1 FNC300 – FLCRT / File create•check Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 34.1 FNC300 – FLCRT / File create•check Outline The FLCRT instruction creates a file inside the CompactFlashTM card mounted in the FX3U-CF-ADP. When executed after creation of a new file, the FLCRT instruction checks the association with the file ID, and evaluates it.
PAGE 745
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 34 FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 34.1 FNC300 – FLCRT / File create•check Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31 Detailed explanation of setting data Details on the setting data in the FLCRT instruction are as shown below. Description Data Type S1 File ID This ID number is associated with the file name. The FLCRT instruction creates a file, and associates the file name with the file ID at the same time.
PAGE 746
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 34 FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 34.2 FNC301 – FLDEL / File delete•CF card format Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 34.2 FNC301 – FLDEL / File delete•CF card format Outline The FLDEL instruction deletes files stored in the CompactFlashTM card, or formats the CompactFlashTM card. → For explanation of the instruction, refer to the CF-ADP Manual. 1.
PAGE 747
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 34 FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 34.2 FNC301 – FLDEL / File delete•CF card format Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31 Detailed explanation of setting data Details on the setting data in the FLDEL instruction are as shown below. Setting items S1 Description Data Type File ID K-1(H0FFFF) : The FLDEL instruction deletes all files. K0 to K63 : The FLDEL instruction deletes a file associated with the specified file ID.
PAGE 748
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 34 FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 34.3 34.3 FNC302 – FLWR / Data write FNC302 – FLWR / Data write Outline The FLWR instruction writes data to the CompactFlashTM card or to the buffer inside the FX3U-CF-ADP. → For explanation of the instruction, refer to the CF-ADP Manual. 1.
PAGE 749
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 34 FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 34.3 FNC302 – FLWR / Data write 31 The FLWR instruction writes data specified by the device S2 to a file stored in the CompactFlash card specified by the file ID or to the buffer inside the CF-ADP. The FLWR instruction can overwrite data in the line position specified by the device S3 +1, and can write additional data (K-1).
PAGE 750
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 34 FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 34.3.1 34.3 FNC302 – FLWR / Data write Detailed explanation of setting data Details on the setting data in the FLWR instruction are as shown below. Setting items Description File ID : K0 to K63 S1 Data Type 16-bit binary Head of devices which store data to be written.
PAGE 751
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 34 FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31 FNC303 – FLRD / Data read FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 34.4 34.4 FNC303 – FLRD / Data read Outline 32 The FLRD instruction reads data from the CompactFlashTM card. 1.
PAGE 752
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 34 FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 34.4.1 34.4 FNC303 – FLRD / Data read Detailed explanation of setting data Details on the setting data in the FLRD instruction are as shown below.
PAGE 753
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 34 FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31 FNC304 – FLCMD / FX3U-CF-ADP command FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 34.5 34.5 FNC304 – FLCMD / FX3U-CF-ADP command Outline The FLCMD instruction gives instruction for operation to the FX3U-CF-ADP. 1.
PAGE 754
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 34 FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 34.5.1 34.5 FNC304 – FLCMD / FX3U-CF-ADP command Detailed explanation of setting data Details on the setting data in the FLCMD instruction are as shown below. Setting items Description Data Type Contents of instruction for operation K0 to K63 : Forcibly writes the buffered data of the specified file ID to the CompactFlashTM card.
PAGE 755
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 34 FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31 FNC305 – FLSTRD / FX3U-CF-ADP status read FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 34.6 34.6 FNC305 – FLSTRD / FX3U-CF-ADP status read Outline 32 The FLSTRD instruction reads the status (including the error information and file information) of the FX3U-CF-ADP. FNC280-FNC289 High-Speed Processing 2 1.
PAGE 756
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 34 FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 34.6.1 34.6 FNC305 – FLSTRD / FX3U-CF-ADP status read Detailed explanation of setting data Details on the setting data in the FLSTRD instruction are as shown below.
PAGE 757
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 34 FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 34.6 FNC305 – FLSTRD / FX3U-CF-ADP status read 31 Setting items FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 • When S is "K768 (H300)" The FLSTRD instruction reads the version information of the CF-ADP. Description Stores the version of CF-ADP. (Example) K100 = Ver. 1.
PAGE 758
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 35. SFC Program and Step Ladder This chapter explains the programming procedures and sequence operations for the “SFC” and “step ladder” programming methods in GX Works2 and GX Developer. 35.1 SFC Program 35.1.1 Outline Sequence control using the SFC (sequential function chart) is available in FX PLCs.
PAGE 759
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 31 *1 When X001 turns ON Y030 31 Activated SET Y030 31 Y31 SET X001 TRAN Y31 programmed in the SET instruction remains ON even TRAN if S31 turns OFF. Y31 Transfer condition Y030 32 X002 3 TRAN Activated Y030 32 S32 is activated, and S31 is automatically reset.
PAGE 760
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1.3 35.1 SFC Program SFC program creating procedure Create an SFC program using the following procedure: 1.
PAGE 761
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 31 FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 3. Assigning devices Assign devices of a PLC in the created process drawing.
PAGE 762
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 4. Inputting and indicating a program using GX Works2 and GX Developer • Input a circuit for setting the initial state relay to ON using the relay ladder. In this example, the initial state relay S0 is set to ON in a ladder block using the special auxiliary relay M8002 which turns ON momentarily when the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN.
PAGE 763
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31 Handling and role of initial state relay FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 35.1.4 35.1 SFC Program Handling of the initial state relay • A state relay located at the head of an SFC program is the initial state relay. Only state relays S0 to S9 are available.
PAGE 764
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1.6 35.1 SFC Program Role of the RET instruction • Use the RET instruction at the end of an SFC program. When inputting an SFC program using GX Works2 and GX Developer, however, it is not necessary to input the RET instruction (because RET instruction is automatically written). • In a PLC, two or more SFC blocks can be put between step 0 and the END instruction.
PAGE 765
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 31 20 Y001 21 Y002 32 When S21 or S22 is ON, Y002 is output. 22 Y002 FNC280-FNC289 High-Speed Processing 2 • In different state relays, the same output device (Y002 in this example) can be programmed as shown in the right figure. In this case, when S21 or S22 is ON, Y002 is output.
PAGE 766
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program Operation of “ ” and “V” Use “ ” to express transfer to a state relay in an upper position (repeat), transfer to a state relay in a lower position (jump), or transfer to a state relay in a separate flow. Use “V” to express reset of a state relay.
PAGE 767
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 31 For output disability corresponding to emergency stop, follow “Cautions on safety” described in the PLC manual. 1) Resetting multiple state relays at one time by specifying a range Resetting fifty-one state relays from S0 to S50 are reset time.
PAGE 768
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program Programming complicated transfer conditions In a transfer condition circuit, the ANB, ORB, MPS, MRD and MPP instructions are not available.
PAGE 769
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 31 X001 (Transfer input) M2800 M2800 M2800 32 *1 0 SFC block M2800 1 TRAN 50 M2800 2 TRAN 3 *1.
PAGE 770
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1.8 35.1 SFC Program SFC flow formats This section shows operation patterns of single flows and operation patterns when selective branches and parallel branches are combined in SFC programs. 1.
PAGE 771
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 31 When creating an SFC program having two or more initial state relays, separate the blocks for each initial state relay. The ON status can be transferred among SFC programs created by block separation (jump to a different flow).
PAGE 772
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program Composite flows with branches and recombination The single flow format is the fundamental style in process transfer control. Only single flow is sufficient in sequence control for simple operations.
PAGE 773
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31 Program of branch/recombination state relays FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 35.1.9 35.1 SFC Program Selective branch After making a branch, create a transfer condition.
PAGE 774
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 35.1.10 Rule for creating branch circuit Limitation in the number of branch circuits In one parallel branch or selective branch, up to eight circuits can be provided. When there are many parallel branches and selective branches, however, the total number of circuits per initial state is limited to 16 or less.
PAGE 775
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 31 1. When a recombination line is directly connected to a branch line without a state relay When a recombination line is directly connected to a branch line without a state relay as shown below, it is necessary to provide a dummy state relay between the lines. There are no dedicated numbers for dummy state relays.
PAGE 776
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 2. When there are selective branches continuously, reduce the number of branches. 20 X000 1 X001 2 TRAN X004 6 21 TRAN 22 X007 5 TRAN X014 TRAN TRAN 12 13 TRAN TRAN 15 28 26 X006 8 14 27 11 24 X003 X011 TRAN 25 7 4 10 23 3 X010 9 TRAN X013 X017 TRAN 16 X016 TRAN TRAN 29 Transform as follows.
PAGE 777
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 31 * * <*> <*> <*> <*> 32 33 4. In the flow shown below, it is not determined whether a selective or parallel branch is provided. Change it as shown below. X000 X001 TRAN 2 X000 34 FNC300-FNC305 FX3U-CF-ADP 1 FNC290-FNC299 Extension File Register Control * FNC280-FNC289 High-Speed Processing 2 * FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 3.
PAGE 778
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 6. It is not permitted to cross flows in SFC programs. Change a flow on the left to a flow on the right. This change enables inverse conversion from a program on the instruction word basis into an SFC program. (The flow on the left cannot be converted into an SFC program.) Change Cross is not allowed. 35.1.11 Program examples Examples of single flows 1.
PAGE 779
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 31 Cyclic operation (X001 = OFF, X002 = OFF) When the start button X000 is pressed, the outputs turn ON in the order “Y000 (wait indication) → Y001 (center lamp) → Y002 (center fountain) → Y003 (loop line lamp) → Y007 (loop line fountain) → Y000 (wait indication)”, and then the outputs return to the wait status.
PAGE 780
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 3. Example of cam shaft turning control The limit switches X013 and X011 are provided in two positions, large forward rotation angle and small forward rotation angle. The limit switches X012 and X010 are provided in two positions, large backward rotation angle and small backward rotation angle.
PAGE 781
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 31 FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 4. Example of sequential start and stop The motors M1 to M4 are started in turn by a timer, and stopped in turn in the reverse order. This SFC flow is based on a single flow, and has jumps of state relays.
PAGE 782
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program The partial skip flow shown on the previous page can be expressed in a flow of selective branches and recombination as shown below. Make sure that a flow proceeds from top to bottom, and that a flow does not cross except branch lines and recombination lines.
PAGE 783
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 31 FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 Examples of flows having selective branches and recombination 1. Operation of selective branch • When two or more flows are provided and either one is selected and executed, it is called a selective branch. 20 • For example, when X000 turns ON while S20 is ON, the ON status is transferred to S21; S20 turns OFF, and S21 turns ON.
PAGE 784
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program In an SFC program for selecting large or small products and judging products as either accepted or rejected, selective branches and recombination are adopted as shown in the figure below.
PAGE 785
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 31 FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 Example of flows having parallel branches and recombination 1. Operation of parallel branch • Branches in which all flows proceed at the same time are called parallel branches. • When the operation is finished in each flow and X007 turns ON, the recombination state relay S30 turns ON. S23, S26 and S29 turn OFF.
PAGE 786
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.
PAGE 787
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Step Ladder 35.2.1 Outline 31 FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 35.2 35.2 Step Ladder 35.2.2 Explanation of function and operation Operation of step ladder instructions 35 SFC•STL Programming In a step ladder program, each process performed by the machine is expressed by a state relay.
PAGE 788
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition STL S31 Y030 X001 35.2 Step Ladder SET Y31 SET S32 STL S32 STL *1 Process of S31 When X001 turns ON, S32 turns ON and S31 is automatically reset. S31 Y030 X001 SET Y31 SET S32 STL S32 Y31 programmed in the SET instruction remains ON even if S31 is reset. *3 Y030 *2 Y032 X002 786 SET *1 Y030 Process of S32 S33 Activated Y032 X002 SET S33 *1.
PAGE 789
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31 Expression of step ladder Step ladder programs and SFC programs are substantially the same as described above, but actual programs are expressed as shown below. A step ladder program is expressed as a relay ladder, but it can be created according to the machine control flow using state relays.
PAGE 790
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.2.4 35.2 Step Ladder Creation of step ladder program (SFC program → STL program) The figure on the left shows one state relay extracted as an example from an SFC program. Each state relay has three functions, driving a load, specifying a transfer destination and specifying a transfer condition. The step ladder shown on the right expresses this SFC program as a relay sequence.
PAGE 791
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.2 Step Ladder 31 FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 2. Program for the transfer destination There is no change in programming especially for the transfer destination.
PAGE 792
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.2 Step Ladder Special auxiliary relays For efficiently creating step ladder programs, it is necessary to use some special auxiliary relays. The table below shows major ones. The special auxiliary relays shown below are the same as those available in SFC programs.
PAGE 793
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.2 Step Ladder 31 FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 Output driving method It is required to include a LD or LDI instruction before the last OUT instruction in a state relay. Change such a circuit as shown below. STL S20 32 X005 FNC280-FNC289 High-Speed Processing 2 Y001 Y002 Y003 S20 STL Y001 S20 Y001 or X005 Y003 M8000 Y002 Y003 Insert "Always ON" contact.
PAGE 794
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.2.6 35.2 Step Ladder Program with state relays in branches and recombination 1. Example of selective branch Do not use MPS, MRD, MPP, ANB and ORB instructions in a transfer processing program with branches and recombination. Even in a load driving circuit, MPS instructions cannot be used immediately after STL instructions.
PAGE 795
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.2 Step Ladder 31 Do not use MPS, MRD, MPP, ANB and ORB instructions in a transfer processing program with branches and recombination. Even in a load driving circuit, MPS instructions cannot be used immediately after STL instructions. Pay attention to the programming order so that a branch line does not cross a recombination line.
PAGE 796
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.2 Step Ladder 4. Example of parallel recombination Do not use MPS, MRD, MPP, ANB and ORB instructions in a program with branches and recombination. Even in a load driving circuit, MPS instructions cannot be used immediately after STL instructions. Pay attention to the programming order so that a branch line does not cross a recombination line.
PAGE 797
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.
PAGE 798
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.2.7 35.2 Step Ladder Program examples Examples of single flows 1. Example of flicker circuit • When the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN, the state relay S3 is driven by the initial pulse (M8002). • The state relay S3 outputs Y000. 1 second later, the ON status transfers to the state relay S20. • The state relay S20 outputs Y001. 1.
PAGE 799
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.2 Step Ladder 31 Cyclic operation (X001 = OFF, X002 = OFF) When the start button X000 is pressed, the outputs turn ON in the order “Y000 (wait indication) → Y001 (center lamp) → Y002 (center fountain) → Y003 (loop line lamp) → Y007 (loop line fountain) → Y000 (wait indication)”, and then the outputs return to the wait status.
PAGE 800
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.2 Step Ladder Examples of flows with selective branches and recombination 1. Example of selecting and carrying large and small balls The figure below shows a mechanism which selects and carries large and small balls using conveyors.
PAGE 801
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.
PAGE 802
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder 35.2 Step Ladder Example of flows with parallel branches and recombination When the parts A, B and C are processed in parallel and then assembled, flows having parallel branches and recombination are used. 1. Example of pushbutton type crosswalk A pushbutton type crosswalk shown in the figure below can be expressed in flows having parallel branches and recombination.
PAGE 803
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.
PAGE 804
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.1 Outline 36. Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function This chapter explains the built-in interrupt function and pulse catch function in FX PLC. 36.
PAGE 805
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.2 Common Items 31 Common Items 36.2.1 How to disable interrupt function FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 36.2 32 This section describes how to disable the interrupt function. 1) Programming method Program the FNC 05 (DI) instruction to set the interrupt disabled zone.
PAGE 806
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2) 36.2 Common Items Program example In the program example shown below, when M8053 is set to ON by M20, the interrupt input I301 triggered by X003 is disabled.
PAGE 807
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.2 Common Items 31 FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 3. Operation when a timer is used [interrupt function] Make sure that counting using a general timer is disabled, even a 1ms retentive type timer. In an interrupt routine, use timers for subroutine program T192 to T199. FX3S PLCs are not equipped with timers for subroutine program. 4.
PAGE 808
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.2 Common Items Example in which latched outputs are reset (countermeasures) 1) Program example FNC 04 EI Step 0 X001 C0 X002 K10 RST Y007 Program to reset Y007 at an arbitrary time. FNC 06 FEND I001 M8000 M8001 RST C0 RST C0 RUN monitor (normally OFF) A B Program to deactivate the preceding C0 reset instruction inside the subroutine.
PAGE 809
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.3 Input Interrupt (Interrupt Triggered by External Signal) [Without Delay Function] 31 Input Interrupt (Interrupt Triggered by External Signal) [Without Delay Function] 36.3.1 Input interrupt (interrupt triggered by external signal) [without delay function] FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 36.3 32 FNC280-FNC289 High-Speed Processing 2 1.
PAGE 810
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.3 Input Interrupt (Interrupt Triggered by External Signal) [Without Delay Function] 5. How to disable each interrupt input When any among M8050 to M8055 is set to ON in a program, interrupts from the corresponding input number are disabled. (Refer to the previous page table for the correspondence.) 6.
PAGE 811
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.3 Input Interrupt (Interrupt Triggered by External Signal) [Without Delay Function] 31 When using both an input interrupt and the input refresh (REF instruction) In the program example shown below, an interrupt is processed using the latest input information. Step 0 FNC 04 EI FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 2) Interrupts are enabled by EI instruction.
PAGE 812
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4) 36.3 Input Interrupt (Interrupt Triggered by External Signal) [Without Delay Function] When catching a short pulse In the program example shown below, the ON status is held for a certain period of time after a short pulse turns ON. Pulse input X003 M0 ON ON T0 T0 Step 0 FNC 04 EI M0 M0 T0 The ON/OFF signal in M0 is utilized in this program.
PAGE 813
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31 Examples of practical programs (programs to measure short pulse width) By using a 1 ms retentive type timer or the special data register D8099 (high-speed ring counter), the short pulse width can be measured in 1 ms or 0.1 ms units. 1.
PAGE 814
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.3 Input Interrupt (Interrupt Triggered by External Signal) [Without Delay Function] -Timing chart X010: Preparation for measurement I001(Interrupt processing) I100(Interrupt processing) SW(X000,X001) RST T246 Part A in the previous page Current value of T246 1 2 3 Part B in the previous page 4 5 6 M0 2.
PAGE 815
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31 Input interrupt (Interrupt by External Signal) [With Delay Function] FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 36.4 36.4 Input interrupt (Interrupt by External Signal) [With Delay Function] 1. Outline 2.
PAGE 816
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.5 Timer Interrupt (Interrupt in Constant Cycle) 3. Basic program (programming procedure) Main program Step 0 FNC 04 EI Interrupts are enabled Timer interrupts are enabled after the EI instruction. It is not necessary to program DI (disable interrupt) if there is no zone where input interrupts should be disabled.
PAGE 817
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.5 Timer Interrupt (Interrupt in Constant Cycle) 31 → For program examples in which RAMP (FNC 67) or HKY (FNC 71) instructions are combined, refer to Subsection 36.5.2. In the program example shown below, data is added and the addition result is compared with the set value every 10 ms. 1) Program example Interrupts are enabled by EI instruction.
PAGE 818
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.5 Timer Interrupt (Interrupt in Constant Cycle) 2. Timer interrupt processing of RAMP (FNC 67) instruction The ramp signal output circuit shown below is programmed using the timer interrupt function executed every 10 ms. → For the use method of the instruction execution complete flag M8029, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
PAGE 819
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.5 Timer Interrupt (Interrupt in Constant Cycle) 31 1) When the HKY (FNC 71), SEGL (FNC 74) or PR (FNC 77) instruction is used in an interrupt program, the instruction turns ON M8029 in the interrupt program.
PAGE 820
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.6 36.6 Counter Interrupt - Interrupt Triggered by Counting Up of High-Speed Counter Counter Interrupt - Interrupt Triggered by Counting Up of High-Speed Counter 1. Outline This type of interrupt utilizes the current value of a high-speed counter. 2. Application This type of interrupt is used together with the comparison set instruction DHSCS (FNC 53).
PAGE 821
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31 Pulse Catch Function [M8170 to M8177] If the EI instruction is anywhere in the sequence program, the pulse catch function is always enabled. When an input relay X000 to X007 turns from OFF to ON, a special auxiliary relay M8170 to M8177 is immediately set to ON by interrupt processing. The EI (FNC 04) instruction is not required in FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs.
PAGE 822
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.8 36.8 Pulse width/Pulse period measurement function [M8075 to M8079, D8074 to D8097] Pulse width/Pulse period measurement function [M8075 to M8079, D8074 to D8097] The pulse width/pulse period measurement function stores the values of 1/6 µs ring counters at the input signal rising edge and falling edge to special data registers.
PAGE 823
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.8 Pulse width/Pulse period measurement function [M8075 to M8079, D8074 to D8097] 31 Pulse period measurement The pulse period of the input signal from X000 is measured. FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 2) ON X000 OFF 32 This duration is measured. Interrupts are enabled after the EI (FNC 04) instruction. The main program is described.
PAGE 824
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3) 36.8 Pulse width/Pulse period measurement function [M8075 to M8079, D8074 to D8097] Signal delay time measurement The delay time from the rising edge of the input signal from X000 to the rising edge of the input signal from X001 is measured. ON X000 OFF ON X001 OFF This duration is measured.
PAGE 825
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function 36.8 Pulse width/Pulse period measurement function [M8075 to M8079, D8074 to D8097] 31 The ring counter offers 32-bit data including the most significant bit. The DSUB (FNC21) instruction does not give a correct value because it handles the most significant bit as the sign bit. To obtain a correct value, add the processing inside the dotted frame. 2.
PAGE 826
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) 37. Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) The device numbers and functions of the special auxiliary relays (indicated as "special M" in tables) and special data registers (indicated as "special D" in tables) are shown below.
PAGE 827
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.
PAGE 828
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Number and name Operation and function 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) FX3S Applicable model CorrespondFX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC ing special FX1S device FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC PLC Mode M 8030*1 Battery LED OFF When M8030 set to ON, LED on PLC is not lit even if battery voltage low is detected. →Refer to Subsection 37.2.10.
PAGE 829
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) 31 Transfer from initial state is enabled in automatic operation mode. – Pulse output is given in response to a start input. – M 8043*1 Set this in the last state of zero return mode. Zero return complete – M 8044*1 Set this when machine zero return is detected.
PAGE 830
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Number and name Operation and function Error Detection (Refer to Chapter 38 for details.) [M]8060 I/O configuration error [M]8061 PLC hardware error Serial communication error 0 FX3S Applicable model CorrespondFX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC ing special FX1S device – *1 PLC/PP communication error [M]8062 37.
PAGE 831
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.
PAGE 832
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Number and name 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Operation and function Memory Information [M]8101 [M]8102 Not used [M]8103 ON when [M]8104 installed.
PAGE 833
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.
PAGE 834
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Number and name Operation and function 37.
PAGE 835
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) 31 FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC – – – – – – Data communication error (Master station) (M504) *2 [M]8184*1 Data communication error (Slave station No.1) (M505) *2 *1 [M]8185 Data communication error (Slave station No.2) (M506) *2 [M]8186*1 Data communication error (Slave station No.
PAGE 836
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model CorrespondOperation and function FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC ing special FX1S device Counter Up/down Counter Counting Direction (Refer to Section 4.6 for details.
PAGE 837
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) 31 – – – – – – M 8270 to M 8279 2nd special adapter*1 – – – *2 – – – – – – M 8280 to M 8289 3rd special adapter*1 – – – *2 – – – – – – M 8290 to M 8299 4th special – – – – Analog Special Adapter [FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC], Analog Expansion Board [FX3S/FX3G] (Refer to Subsection 37.2.
PAGE 838
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Number and name Operation and function 37.
PAGE 839
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.
PAGE 840
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Number and name Operation and function 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) FX3S Applicable model CorrespondFX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC ing special FX1S device Positioning [FX3U] (Refer to Positioning Control Manual for details.
PAGE 841
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) 31 Operation and function FX3S RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1] (Refer to Data Communication Edition for details.
PAGE 842
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Number and name Operation and function 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) FX3S Applicable model CorrespondFX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC ing special FX1S device FX3U-CF-ADP [ch1] (Refer to CF-ADP Manual for details.
PAGE 843
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) 31 Operation and function Error Detection (Refer to Chapter 38 for details.) [M]8430 to [M]8437 Not used M 8438 [M]8449 Special block error flag [M]8450 to [M]8459 Not used *1. *2.
PAGE 844
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1.2 37.
PAGE 845
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) 31 Content of register FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Corresponding special device FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC PLC Status Operation frequency of M8007 is stored. Cleared at power-off.
PAGE 846
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Number and name Content of register FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Corresponding special device FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC Input Filter Input filter value of X000 to X017 *1 (Default: 10 ms) →Refer to Subsection 37.2.9.
PAGE 847
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.
PAGE 848
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Number and name Content of register FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Corresponding special device FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC Parallel Link (Refer to Data Communication Edition for details.
PAGE 849
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) 31 Content of register FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Corresponding special device FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC Pulse width/Pulse period measurement [FX3G/FX3GC] (Refer to Section 36.8 for details.
PAGE 850
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Number and name Content of register FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Corresponding special device FX1S – – – – – 2 8 8 4 8 16 4 8 16 – – – – – FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC Memory Information [D]8101 PLC type and system version 1 6 1 0 0 Indicated Version 1.
PAGE 851
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.
PAGE 852
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Number and name Content of register FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Corresponding special device FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC Inverter Communication Function (Refer to Data Communication Edition for details.
PAGE 853
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.
PAGE 854
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.
PAGE 855
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) 31 Content of register FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Corresponding special device FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC Analog Special Adapter [FX3U/FX3UC] (Refer to Subsection 37.2.19 for applicability of each analog special adapter.
PAGE 856
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Number and name Content of register FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Corresponding special device FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC Display Module Function (FX3G-5DM, FX3U-7DM) (Refer to Hardware Edition Manual of PLC main unit used for details.
PAGE 857
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) 31 Content of register FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Corresponding special device FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC Timing Clock (Refer to Section 24.3 for details.) and Positioning [FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC] (Refer to Positioning Control Edition for details.
PAGE 858
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.
PAGE 859
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) 31 Content of register FX3S FX1S M8393 – – – – – – – – – – – *2 – – – – – – *3 – – – – – – – – – – – – M8398 – – – – – FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC Interrupt Program (Refer to Chapter 36 for details.) Delay time D 8393 →Refer to Section 36.4.
PAGE 860
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Number and name Content of register FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Corresponding special device FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2] and Computer Link [ch2] (Refer to Data Communication Edition for details.
PAGE 861
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) 31 Content of register FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Corresponding special device FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC MODBUS communication [ch2] (Refer to MODBUS Communication Edition for details.
PAGE 862
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Number and name Content of register FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Corresponding special device FX1S – – – – – – – – – – – – FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC FX3U-CF-ADP [ch1] (Refer to CF-ADP Manual for details.
PAGE 863
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) 31 Content of register FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Corresponding special device FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC FX3U-ENET-ADP [ch1] (Refer to ENET-ADP Manual for details.
PAGE 864
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Number and name Content of register FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Corresponding special device FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC FX3U-ENET-ADP [ch2] (Refer to ENET-ADP Manual for details.
PAGE 865
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) 31 Content of register FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Corresponding special device FX1S – – – – – – FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC Positioning [FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC] (Refer to Positioning Control Edition for details.
PAGE 866
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) This section explains how to use the provided special devices to activate built-in PLC functions for additional program control. 37.2.1 RUN monitor and initial pulse [M8000 to M8003] 1.
PAGE 867
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31 Watchdog timer [D8000] The watchdog timer monitors the operation (scan) time of the PLC. When the operation is not completed within the specified time, ERROR (ERR) LED light turns on and all outputs are turned OFF. When the power is initially turned ON, "200 ms" is transferred from the system to D8000 as the default value.
PAGE 868
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2.4 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) Power failure detection time [D8008, M8008 and M8007] 1. FX3U PLC (AC power supply type) The table below shows the allowable momentary power failure time in FX3U PLC (AC power supply type).
PAGE 869
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31 Real time clock [M8015 to M8019 and D8013 to D8019] 1. Assignment of special auxiliary relays (M8015 to M8019) and special data registers (D8013 to D8019) Number Name Operation and function M8016 Time read display is stopped When M8016 turns ON, the time display is stopped (but RTC is continued).
PAGE 870
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2.8 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) How to set real time clock The real time clock is set by the following method. 1. Method using the display module This subsection explains how to set the real time clock in the display module FX3U-7DM (built in the FX3UC-32MT-LT (-2)). Refer to the following manual for the display module FX3G-5DM.
PAGE 871
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) 31 1) Method using TWR (FNC167) instruction dedicated to time setting. 2) Method using M8015 and D8013 to D8019. When not using TWR (FNC167) instruction dedicated to time setting, the following program can be used for time setting. → For details, refer to Subsection 21.8. M0 indicates a set item.
PAGE 872
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2.9 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) Input filter adjustment [D8020] The inputs X000 to X017*1 have a digital filter circuit with a setting range of 0 to 60 ms. The digital filter setting value is set between 0 to 60*2 ms (in 1 ms steps) in special data register D8020. After the PLC powers ON, D8020 is automatically set to K10 (10 ms).
PAGE 873
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) 31 When M8030 is set to ON, the battery LED does not turn ON even if the voltage in the battery for memory backup becomes low. When the indication of "battery voltage low error" is not required or when the battery is removed, set M8030 to ON.
PAGE 874
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) 37.2.11 Built-in analog volume [D8030 and D8031] Values of variable analog potentiometers built in FX3S/FX3G PLCs*1 as standard are stored as numeric data ranging from 0 to 255 in the following special registers in accordance with the scale position.
PAGE 875
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) 31 When M8034 is turned ON, the output memory is cleared. As a result, all actual output relay contacts are turned OFF and the PLC is operated in the image memory. 1. Program example M8034 32 FNC280-FNC289 High-Speed Processing 2 Command input All outputs are disabled (image RUN status). 37.2.
PAGE 876
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) 4. RUN/STOP command via the programming tool 1) Using the programming software for personal computer There is a remote RUN/STOP function in the programming software. By using the programming software, the PLC can be set to the RUN or STOP mode by giving a command from the personal computer.
PAGE 877
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) 31 When the analog expansion board is connected, operations and functions are assigned to devices shown in the table below in accordance with the connection position. Operations and functions in the table below are shaded for write-prohibited devices. → For details, refer to the Analog Control Edition.
PAGE 878
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) 2. Special data register (D8260 to D8279) • FX3S/FX3G PLCs Operation and function Number Applicable version FX3G-2AD-BD FX3G-1DA-BD Ver. 1.10 or later*1 Ver. 1.
PAGE 879
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) 31 When analog special adapters are connected, operations and functions are assigned to the devices shown in the tables below in accordance with the number of connected analog special adapters. Devices which cannot be written to are shaded in the "Operation and function" column.
PAGE 880
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Number Applicable version 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) Operation and function FX3U-4AD-PT(W)-ADP Ver. 1.30 or later*1 FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP Ver. 1.30 or later*1 FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP Ver. 1.
PAGE 881
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) 31 FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 • FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs Operation and function Number Applicable version FX3U-4AD-ADP FX3U-4DA-ADP FX3U-3A-ADP Ver. 1.00 or later Ver. 1.00 or later Ver. 1.
PAGE 882
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) 2. Special data registers (D8260 to D8299) • FX3U/FX3UC PLC Number FX3U-4AD-ADP Applicable Ver. 1.
PAGE 883
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.
PAGE 884
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) • FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC PLCs Number Applicable version Operation and function FX3U-4AD-ADP FX3U-4DA-ADP FX3U-3A-ADP Ver. 1.00 or later Ver. 1.00 or later Ver. 1.
PAGE 885
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) 31 FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 Number Operation and function FX3U-4AD-PT(W)-ADP FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP Ver. 1.00 or later Ver. 1.00 or later Ver. 1.
PAGE 886
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 38 Error Check Method and Error Code List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 38.1 States and Colors of LEDs PLC Operation Status 38. Error Check Method and Error Code List When an error occurs while the program is being executed, troubleshoot the cause of the error in accordance with this chapter. For error details, refer to the Data Communication Edition and the Hardware Edition of the PLC main unit. 38.
PAGE 887
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 38 Error Check Method and Error Code List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition LED status Lit Unlit One of the following has occurred: • • The voltage or current is incorrectly supplied • to the power terminal. • The wiring is incorrect. • There is fault inside the PLC. Check the power supply voltage. Disconnect cables except the power cable, turn the PLC power ON again, and verify that the status is changed.
PAGE 888
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 38 Error Check Method and Error Code List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 38.1.5 ERROR (ERR) LED [lit, flickering or unlit] LED status PLC status Lit A watchdog timer error has occurred, or the hardware of the PLC may be damaged. Flickering One of the following errors occur in PLC: • Parameter error • Syntax error • Circuit error Execute PLC diagnostics and program check by programming tool. For instructions, refer to Section 38.4.
PAGE 889
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 38 Error Check Method and Error Code List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31 L ERR LED [FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)] Mode LED status PLC status • • Lit • Action Securely connect the built-in master to remote I/O units and remote device stations on the network. Make sure that the connected remote I/O units and remote device stations are consistent with the detailed information on remote stations.
PAGE 890
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 38 Error Check Method and Error Code List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 38.2 Error Code Check Method and Indication 38.2.1 Error code check method by display module 38.2 Error Code Check Method and Indication The error code can be checked by programming tool and display module. This subsection explains how to set the real time clock in the display module FX3U-7DM (built in the FX3UC-32MT-LT (-2)).
PAGE 891
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31 Error code check method by GX Works2 Connect a personal computer to PLC. 32 Execute PLC diagnostics. FNC280-FNC289 High-Speed Processing 2 1 2 38.2 Error Code Check Method and Indication FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 38.2.2 38 Error Check Method and Error Code List Click [Diagnostics]→[PLC Diagnostics] on the menu bar, and execute the PLC diagnostics.
PAGE 892
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 38 Error Check Method and Error Code List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 38.2.3 38.2 Error Code Check Method and Indication Error indication The table below shows the error expression in this manual, GX Works2, GX Developer, and display modules (FX3U7DM). • Comparison between this manual and GX Works2.
PAGE 893
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 38 Error Check Method and Error Code List 38.3 Supplementary Explanation of Devices for Error Detection Supplementary Explanation of Devices for Error Detection 38.3.1 Error detection (M8060 to/D8060 to) FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 38.3 31 M8060,M8061,M8064 to M8067 are cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN. Note that M8068 and D8068 do not clear.
PAGE 894
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 38 Error Check Method and Error Code List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 38.3.2 38.3 Supplementary Explanation of Devices for Error Detection Operations of special devices for error detection Special auxiliary relays for error detection and special data registers for error detection operate in the relationship shown below.
PAGE 895
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 38 Error Check Method and Error Code List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31 Error Code List and Action When a program error occurs in the PLC, the error code is stored in the special data registers D8060 to D8067, D8438, D8449, D8487 and D8489, and the error bit turns ON in the special data register D8166 as follows. The following actions should be taken.
PAGE 896
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 38 Error Check Method and Error Code List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Error code PLC operation at error occurrence 38.4 Error Code List and Action Contents of error Action PLC hardware error [M8061(D8061)] 6103 I/O bus error (M8069 = ON) 6104 Powered extension unit 24 V failure (M8069 = ON) 6105 Watchdog timer error Verify that extension cables are correctly connected. Confirm user program.
PAGE 897
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 38 Error Check Method and Error Code List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 38.
PAGE 898
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Error code PLC operation at error occurrence Contents of error 38 Error Check Method and Error Code List 38.
PAGE 899
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 38 Error Check Method and Error Code List 38.4 Error Code List and Action 31 PLC operation at error occurrence Contents of error FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 Error code Action Operation error [M8067(D8067)] 0000 ⎯ No error • 6701 • CALL instruction nesting level is 6 or more 6703 Interrupt nesting level is 3 or more 6704 FOR-NEXT instruction nesting level is 6 or more.
PAGE 900
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Error code PLC operation at error occurrence Contents of error 38 Error Check Method and Error Code List 38.4 Error Code List and Action Action Operation error [M8067(D8067)] 6748 set value. Verify that the target setting contents are correct.
PAGE 901
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 38 Error Check Method and Error Code List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 38.4 Error Code List and Action 31 PLC operation at error occurrence Contents of error Action Operation error [M8067(D8067)] Port specified by inverter communication instruction is already used in another communication. 6762 2) Input (X) specified by a DSZR, DVIT or ZRN instruction is already used in another instruction.
PAGE 902
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series 38 Error Check Method and Error Code List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Error code PLC operation at error occurrence 38.4 Error Code List and Action Contents of error Action Special parameter error [M8489(D8489)] Special parameter setting time-out error Turn OFF the power, and check the power supply and connection of special adapters/special blocks. Special parameter setting error Special parameters are set improperly.
PAGE 903
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition A-1 Programming Tool Applicability 31 Programming tool applicability 33 GX Works2 • GX Works2 English version (SWDNC-GXW2-E) is applicable to FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs from the following versions. Model name FX3G PLC FX3GC PLC Ver. 1.492N or later - Before Ver. 1.40 Ver. 1.08J or later Before Ver. 2.00 Ver. 1.62Q or later Ver. 2.
PAGE 904
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2) A-1 Programming Tool Applicability GX Developer • GX Developer English version (SWD5C-GPPW-E) is applicable to FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs from the following versions. Model name FX3G PLC FX3U PLC FX3UC PLC PLC version Applicable GX Developer version Before Ver. 1.10 Ver. 8.72A or later Ver. 1.10 Ver. 8.78G or later Before Ver. 2.30 Ver. 8.
PAGE 905
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition A-1 Programming Tool Applicability 31 Even using a programming tool not applicable to the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, programming is enabled when an alternative model is set.
PAGE 906
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition A-1 Programming Tool Applicability In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs 1) RS-422/RS-232C/USB communication The FX3U/FX3UC PLCs can write and read programs and perform monitoring at 115.2 kbps through RS-422/RS232C/USB communication. a) 115.2 kbps supported programming tools GX Works2 (Ver. 1.08J or later), GX Developer (Ver. 8.18U or later), FX-30P (Ver. 1.
PAGE 907
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition A-1 Programming Tool Applicability 31 PLC FX3S Remarks Ver. 1.492N or later Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX3S PLC earlier than Ver. 1.00. Ver. 1.07H or later Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX3G PLC earlier than Ver. 1.40. Ver. 1.
PAGE 908
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition A-1 Programming Tool Applicability Cautions on writing during RUN Item Caution Program memory which can be written in RUN mode • • Number of program steps which can be written for circuit change in RUN mode • • • • GX Works2 Ver. 1.08J or later GX Developer Ver. 8.72A or later GX Works2 Ver. 1.08J or later GX Developer Ver. 8.
PAGE 909
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition A-1 Programming Tool Applicability 31 Caution During RUN, avoid writing to a circuit block including the following instructions under execution. If writing is executed during RUN to such a circuit block, the PLC decelerates and stops pulse output.
PAGE 910
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Appendix A-1-3 A-1 Programming Tool Applicability Precautions on Use of (Built-in USB) Programming Port Make sure to set the contents described in this section when using the (built-in USB) programming port of the FX3G/ FX3GC PLC to execute ladder monitor, device monitor, program read/write, etc by GX Developer. For GX Developer prior to Ver. 8.
PAGE 911
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Cautions on using transparent function by way of USB in GOT1000 Series Make sure to provide the following setting when executing ladder monitor, device monitor, and reading/writing programs in an FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC using GX Developer or later and the transparent function by way of the USB in the GOT1000 Series.
PAGE 912
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Appendix A-1-5 A-1 Programming Tool Applicability Cautions on using transparent (2-port) function of GOT-F900 Series Make sure to provide the following setting when executing ladder monitor, device monitor, etc. in an FX3G/FX3GC/ FX3U/FX3UC PLC using GX Developer and the transparent (2-port) function of the GOT-F900 Series.
PAGE 913
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition A-2 Peripheral product applicability (except programming tools) 31 Appendix A-2-1 FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 Appendix A-2 Peripheral product applicability (except programming tools) Peripheral product applicability 32 FX3S PLC Applicability Remarks Standard monitor OS, communication driver and option OS which support the FX3S PLC are required.
PAGE 914
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition A-2 Peripheral product applicability (except programming tools) FX3G/FX3GC PLCs Product Name Applicability Remarks Standard monitor OS, communication driver and option OS which support the FX3G/FX3GC PLCs are required. For details, refer to the GOT manual.
PAGE 915
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition A-3 Version Upgrade History 31 Appendix A-3-1 FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 Appendix A-3 Version Upgrade History Manufacturer's serial number check method 1. Checking the nameplate The year and month of production of the product can be checked from the manufacturer's serial number S/N indicated on the label adhered to the right side of the product.
PAGE 916
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Appendix A-3-2 A-3 Version Upgrade History Version check The PLC version can be verified by monitoring the special data register D8001 or D8101 and checking the last three digits. Or for the FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, the PLC version can be verified in "PLC Status" within the display module.
PAGE 917
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Version Ver. 1.40 Manufacturer’s serial number 121**** (January, 2012) Contents of version upgrade First product Corresponds to FX3G PLC Ver. 1.40. • 124**** (April, 2012) • Ver. 2.
PAGE 918
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Manufacturer’s serial number Contents of version upgrade Ver. 2.20 55**** (May, 2005) Supports the functions described as "Ver. 2.20 or later" in this manual.
PAGE 919
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-1 Basic Instruction Execution Time 31 FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 Appendix B: Instruction Execution Time 32 The instruction execution time in FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs is as shown below: FNC280-FNC289 High-Speed Processing 2 Measurement condition • High-speed counters and interrupt instructions (I) are not used together.
PAGE 920
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Instruction Execution time in ON status (µs) 16-bit instruction B-1 Basic Instruction Execution Time Execution time in OFF status (µs) 32-bit instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction Remarks Output instructions OUT Y,M 1.2 µs in 2-step instruction 0.21 OUT S 1.25 1.25 OUT T K 2.41 2.16 OUT T D 2.77 2.54 OUT C K 1.9 2.25 1.57 1.72 C235 to C255 1.
PAGE 921
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-1 Basic Instruction Execution Time 31 Instruction Execution time in ON status (µs) 16-bit instruction Execution time in OFF status (µs) 32-bit instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 • FX3G/FX3GC PLCs (Standard mode) Remarks Contact instructions 0.21 LDI 0.21 32 1.34 µs in 2-step instruction*1 1.34 µs in 3-step instruction*3 1.
PAGE 922
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Execution time in ON status (µs) Instruction 16-bit instruction B-1 Basic Instruction Execution Time Execution time in OFF status (µs) 32-bit instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction Remarks Output instructions OUT T D 2.77 T246 to T319 3.06 µs in execution in ON status 2.41 µs in execution in OFF status 2.54 OUT C K 1.9 2.25 1.57 1.72 C235 to C255 1.
PAGE 923
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-1 Basic Instruction Execution Time 31 Instruction Execution time in ON status (µs) 16-bit instruction Execution time in OFF status (µs) 32-bit instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 • FX3G/FX3GC PLCs (Extension mode) Remarks Contact instructions 0.42 LDI 0.42 32 1.68 µs in 2-step instruction*1 1.68 µs in 3-step instruction*3 1.
PAGE 924
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Execution time in ON status (µs) Instruction 16-bit instruction B-1 Basic Instruction Execution Time Execution time in OFF status (µs) 32-bit instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction Remarks Output instructions OUT T D 3.55 T246 to T319 3.83 µs in execution in ON status 3.19 µs in execution in OFF status 3.32 OUT C K 2.68 3.02 2.35 2.89 C235 to C255 2.
PAGE 925
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-1 Basic Instruction Execution Time 31 Instruction Execution time in ON status (µs) 16-bit instruction Execution time in OFF status (µs) 32-bit instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 • FX3U/FX3UC PLCs Remarks Contact instructions 0.065 LDI 0.065 0.193 µs in 3-step instruction*3 7.8 ⎯ LDF 7.8 ⎯ ANI 0.065 0.
PAGE 926
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-1 Basic Instruction Execution Time Execution time in ON status (µs) Instruction 16-bit instruction Execution time in OFF status (µs) 32-bit instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction Remarks Output instructions RST S 4.6 0.13 RST T 0.45 0.45 RST C 0.45 5.8 0.45 4.8 RST D 5.4 ⎯ 0.195 ⎯ PLS Y,M 0.257 0.321 µs in M3584 to M7679 PLF Y,M 0.257 0.
PAGE 927
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-2 Step Ladder Instruction Execution Time 31 FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 Appendix B-2 Step Ladder Instruction Execution Time • FX3S PLC Instruction Execution time in ON status (µs) 16-bit instruction Execution time in OFF status (µs) 32-bit instruction 16-bit instruction Remarks 32-bit instruction 3.36 + 1.19n ⎯ RET 2.
PAGE 928
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-4 Applied Instruction Execution Time Appendix B-4 Applied Instruction Execution Time • FX3S PLC FNC No. Instruction Execution time in ON status (µs) Execution time in OFF status (µs) 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction 2.59 ⎯ 0.61 ⎯ 6.44 (CALL+SRET) ⎯ 0.61 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Remarks Program flow 00 CJ 01 CALL 02 SRET 03 IRET 6.
PAGE 929
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-4 Applied Instruction Execution Time 31 Execution time in OFF status (µs) REF X:8.75+0.45n Y:8.85+0.90n ⎯ 0.61 ⎯ FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 Execution time in ON status (µs) 50 52 MTR 14.72 ⎯ 1.65 ⎯ HSCS ⎯ 10.8 ⎯ 32 53 0.61 0.61 FNC No.
PAGE 930
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition FNC No. Instruction Execution time in ON status (µs) 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction B-4 Applied Instruction Execution Time Execution time in OFF status (µs) 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction Remarks External device 170 GRY 11.46 11.81 0.61 0.61 171 GBIN 11.46 11.83 0.61 0.61 224 LD= 1.56 1.8 1.52 1.76 For details, refer to Appendix B-6-2. 225 LD> 1.
PAGE 931
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-4 Applied Instruction Execution Time 31 Standard mode FNC No.
PAGE 932
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-4 Applied Instruction Execution Time Standard mode FNC No. Execution time in ON status (µs) Instruction Extension mode Execution time in OFF status (µs) 16-bit 32-bit instruc instruc tion tion 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction ZRST(D) 7.96+0.22n ⎯ 0.61 ZRST(T) 8.77+0.46n ⎯ 0.61 ZRST(M) 14.76+0.37n ⎯ 8.
PAGE 933
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-4 Applied Instruction Execution Time 31 FNC No.
PAGE 934
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-4 Applied Instruction Execution Time Standard mode FNC No. Instruction Execution time in ON status (µs) Extension mode Execution time in OFF status (µs) 16-bit 32-bit instruc instruc tion tion 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction 233 AND> 1.88 2.24 1.84 234 AND< 1.92 2.36 236 AND<> 1.
PAGE 935
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-4 Applied Instruction Execution Time 31 FNC No. Instruction Execution time in ON status (µs) Execution time in OFF status (µs) 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction 8.0 ⎯ 0.195 ⎯ ⎯ 0.195 ⎯ FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 • FX3U/FX3UC PLCs Remarks Program flow CJ 01 CALL 02 SRET 13.5 (CALL+SRET) ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 03 IRET 4.
PAGE 936
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition FNC No. Instruction Execution time in ON status (µs) B-4 Applied Instruction Execution Time Execution time in OFF status (µs) 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction Remarks Data operation ZRST(D) 11.1 + 0.19n ⎯ 0.325 ⎯ n: Number of reset points 40 ZRST(T) 17.1 + 0.23n ⎯ 0.325 ⎯ n: Number of reset points ZRST(M) 20.7 + 0.
PAGE 937
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-4 Applied Instruction Execution Time 31 Execution time in ON status (µs) Instruction Execution time in OFF status (µs) Remarks 32-bit instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction FROM*1 141 + 419n 119 + 841n 0.585 1.105 n: Number of transfer points FROM*2 107 + 903n 119 + 1791n 0.585 1.105 n: Number of transfer points FROM*3 27.9 + 108n 17.6 + 187.4n 0.
PAGE 938
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition FNC No. Instruction Execution time in ON status (µs) B-4 Applied Instruction Execution Time Execution time in OFF status (µs) 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction Remarks Floating point 124 EXP ⎯ 11.9 ⎯ 0.585 125 LOGE ⎯ 24.0 ⎯ 0.585 126 LOG10 ⎯ 24.3 ⎯ 0.585 127 ESQR ⎯ 10.6 ⎯ 0.585 128 ENEG ⎯ 8.9 ⎯ 0.
PAGE 939
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-4 Applied Instruction Execution Time 31 Execution time in ON status (µs) Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction Execution time in OFF status (µs) 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 FNC No. Remarks Real time clock control 160 TCMP 21.3 ⎯ 0.715 ⎯ 161 TZCP 22.6 ⎯ 0.585 ⎯ 162 TADD 13.4 ⎯ 0.455 ⎯ ⎯ 0.455 ⎯ 10.8 11.
PAGE 940
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition FNC No. B-4 Applied Instruction Execution Time Execution time in ON status (µs) Instruction Execution time in OFF status (µs) Remarks 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction 206 MIDR 25 + 0.59n + 0.68m ⎯ 0.455 ⎯ n: Character position m: Number of characters 207 MIDW 25.8 + 0.3m + 0.44n ⎯ 0.
PAGE 941
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-4 Applied Instruction Execution Time 31 Instruction Execution time in ON status (µs) Execution time in OFF status (µs) FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 FNC No. Remarks 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction 237 AND<= 1.22 1.48 1.22 1.48 For details, refer to Appendix B-6-2. 238 AND>= 1.22 1.48 1.22 1.
PAGE 942
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition FNC No. Instruction Execution time in ON status (µs) B-4 Applied Instruction Execution Time Execution time in OFF status (µs) 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction ⎯ Remarks Data move 3 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ RBFM*1 50+900n ⎯ 0.715 ⎯ RBFM*2 244 + 103n ⎯ 0.715 ⎯ WBFM*1 24 + 966n ⎯ 0.715 ⎯ WBFM*2 292 + 116n ⎯ 0.
PAGE 943
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B Instruction Execution Time B-5 Execution Time of Pulse Generation Instruction P in Each Applied Instruction • FX3S PLC Applied instruction BCD instruction (FNC 18) BIN instruction (FNC 19) SUB instruction (FNC 21) MUL instruction (FNC 22) INC instruction (FNC 24) DEC instruction (FNC 25) WOR instruction (FNC 27) WXOR instruction (FNC 28) 33 Non-execution time: Execution time in OFF status = 1.
PAGE 944
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B Instruction Execution Time B-5 Execution Time of Pulse Generation Instruction P in Each Applied Instruction • FX3G/FX3GC PLCs (Standard mode) Applied instruction MOV instruction (FNC 12) BCD instruction (FNC 18) BIN instruction (FNC 19) ADD instruction (FNC 20) SUB instruction (FNC 21) MUL instruction (FNC 22) DIV instruction (FNC 23) INC instruction (FNC 24) DEC instruction (FNC 25) WAND instruction (FNC 26) WOR
PAGE 945
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B Instruction Execution Time B-5 Execution Time of Pulse Generation Instruction P in Each Applied Instruction 31 Applied instruction MOV instruction (FNC 12) BCD instruction (FNC 18) ADD instruction (FNC 20) SUB instruction (FNC 21) DIV instruction (FNC 23) INC instruction (FNC 24) WAND instruction (FNC 26) WOR instruction (FNC 27) Other applied instructions Non-execution time: Execution time in OFF status = 1.
PAGE 946
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-6 Execution Time on Combination of Applicable Devices and Indexing Appendix B-6 Execution Time on Combination of Applicable Devices and Indexing In examples shown below for basic instructions, the MOV instruction and data comparison instructions, the instruction execution time varies depending on the combination of target devices and absence/presence of indexing.
PAGE 947
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-6 Execution Time on Combination of Applicable Devices and Indexing 31 Command contact S (source) OFF KnX,KnY,KnM,KnS*1 T,C,D,R K,H *1. 0.64 0.72 14.68 8.28 1.56 1.8 16.42 9.92 0.88 0.48 0.84 0.52 13.08 12.28 6.68 5.78 1.84 1.24 1.96 1.4 14.82 13.22 8.32 7.22 0.36 0.58 0.52 33 0.
PAGE 948
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-6 Execution Time on Combination of Applicable Devices and Indexing - DMOV instruction (32-bit instruction) D (destination) Command contact ON Without indexing (µs) S (source) With indexing (µs) KnX,KnY,KnM,KnS 15.5 12.4 13.8 U \G *3 311.1 18.7 17.0 17.1 U \G *3 313.0 T,C,D 12.4 10.7 307.4 17.0 15.2 15.3 310.5 R 13.8 1.48*1 10.7 12.2 308.9 17.1 15.3 15.
PAGE 949
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-6 Execution Time on Combination of Applicable Devices and Indexing 31 FNC277-FNC279 Data Transfer 3 • FX3G/FX3GC PLCs - Data comparison instruction (16-bit operation) D (destination) Standard mode S (source) Without indexing (µs) T,C,D,R KnY, KnM, KnS T,C,D,R KnS*1 Without indexing (µs) With indexing (µs) KnY, KnM, KnS T,C,D,R KnY, KnM, KnS T,C,D,R 10.
PAGE 950
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series C Applied Instruction List [by Instruction Type/in Alphabetic Order] Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition C-1 Applied instructions [by instruction type] Appendix C: Applied Instruction List [by Instruction Type/in Alphabetic Order] Appendix C-1 Applied instructions [by instruction type] Applied instructions are classified into the following nineteen types: 1 Data transfer instructions 11 Program flow control instructions 2 Data conversion instru
PAGE 951
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series C Applied Instruction List [by Instruction Type/in Alphabetic Order] Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition C-1 Applied instructions [by instruction type] C Mnemonic FNC No. OR<> FNC244 FNC245 OR Compare S1 ≠ S2 OR Compare S1 ≤ S2 OR Compare Ref. Page 658 658 6. Special function instructions FNC No.
PAGE 952
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series C Applied Instruction List [by Instruction Type/in Alphabetic Order] Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition C-1 Applied instructions [by instruction type] 9. Data operation instructions Mnemonic FNC No. Function 11.Program flow control instructions Ref. Page FNC No. Function Ref.
PAGE 953
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series C Applied Instruction List [by Instruction Type/in Alphabetic Order] Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition C-1 Applied instructions [by instruction type] C Function 19.Other handy instructions Ref. Page FNC No.
PAGE 954
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series C Applied Instruction List [by Instruction Type/in Alphabetic Order] Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition C-2 Applied instructions [in alphabetical order] Appendix C-2 Applied instructions [in alphabetical order] Mnemonic FNC No. Function Ref. Page Symbol FNC No. Function Ref.
PAGE 955
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series C Applied Instruction List [by Instruction Type/in Alphabetic Order] Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition C-2 Applied instructions [in alphabetical order] C FNC No. Function Ref.
PAGE 956
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series C Applied Instruction List [by Instruction Type/in Alphabetic Order] Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Mnemonic FNC No. Function C-2 Applied instructions [in alphabetical order] Ref. Page P FNC No.
PAGE 957
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series D Discontinued models Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition C Applicable Instruction List Appendix D: Discontinued models Discontinued model Production stop date Repair acceptance period FX3U-232ADP September 30, 2013 Until September 30, 2020 FX3U-485ADP September 30, 2013 Until September 30, 2020 FX-PCS/WIN(-E) March 31, 2013 FX-20P(-E) December 31, 2012 Until December 31, 2019 - FX-10DU(-E) December 31, 2012 Until December 31, 2019
PAGE 958
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series D Discontinued models Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition MEMO 956
PAGE 959
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Warranty Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Warranty Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product. 1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company.
PAGE 960
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Revised History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Revised History Date Created Revision Description 7/2005 A First Edition 2/2006 B FX3U and FX3UC series version 2.30 compatible • Two instructions are added. - MEP, MEF [Section 3.1, Chapter 7, Appendix A-1-2, Appendix 8-1] • Functions of instructions are added - MUL (FNC 22) [Section 6.5.2, Section 10.3, Section 36.1.1] - DIV (FNC 23) [Section 6.5.2, Section 10.4, Section 36.1.
PAGE 961
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Revised History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Date Created Revision Description 3/2007 C • Caution on storing sign data of character string is added [Section 26.2]. • The sentence describing rough guide to the watchdog timer set value is modified [Sections 33.3 and 33.6]. • Note on using state relays (S) in contact instructions is added [Subsections 34.1.2 and 34.2.2].
PAGE 962
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series Revised History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 960 Date Created Revision Description 7/2011 J • Supported in FX3G series version 1.40 - 1 instruction added. IVMC(FNC275)[Section 30.6] • Supported in FX3U and FX3UC series version 3.00 - Supports storage of symbolic information. - Support of the setting "Read-protect the execution program" for block passwords. - Special block error condition (D8166) is added.
PAGE 963
PAGE 964
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS PROGRAMMING MANUAL Basic & Applied Instruction Edition HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN HIMEJI WORKS: 840, CHIYODA CHO, HIMEJI, JAPAN MODEL FX-P3-E MODEL CODE 09R517 JY997D16601N (MEE) Effective Sep. 2013 Specifications are subject to change without notice.